359
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer User’s Manual www.jdsu.com

JD7105A User's Manual R1.7

  • Upload
    troan

  • View
    137

  • Download
    7

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

User’s Manual

ww

w.jdsu.com

1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................................... 1List of Figures .......................................................................................................................................... 8List of Tables .......................................................................................................................................... 101.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3JD7105A ................................................................................................................................ 1-3

JD7105A Highlights ....................................................................................................................... 1-4Advantage .............................................................................................................................. 1-4Functions ................................................................................................................................ 1-4Applicable Systems ................................................................................................................ 1-4

Safety Information ......................................................................................................................... 1-5Safety Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 1-5Safety Consideration .............................................................................................................. 1-5Input Power ............................................................................................................................ 1-6Electrostatic Discharge Precautions (ESD) ........................................................................... 1-7

2.0 GETTING STARTED ............................................................................................................................ 2-1Unpacking the JD7105A ................................................................................................................ 2-2JD7105A Standard Accessories .................................................................................................... 2-3Layout & Hard/Soft Keys ............................................................................................................... 2-4Front View ..................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Power Switch ......................................................................................................................... 2-6Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 2-6Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 2-6ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6Save ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6Load ....................................................................................................................................... 2-7System ................................................................................................................................... 2-7Data Entry Key ....................................................................................................................... 2-9Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 2-9Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 2-10Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 2-12BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 2-13Marker .................................................................................................................................. 2-13Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 2-14Measure ............................................................................................................................... 2-15Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 2-17

Top View ...................................................................................................................................... 2-18RF In .................................................................................................................................... 2-19DC 15V ~ 19V In .................................................................................................................. 2-19RF Out .................................................................................................................................. 2-19External In ............................................................................................................................ 2-19SYS I/O ................................................................................................................................ 2-19E1/T1 .................................................................................................................................... 2-20Grip ....................................................................................................................................... 2-20

3.0 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ...................................................................................................................... 3-1Spectrum Analyzer Introduction .................................................................................................... 3-2

Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................................................. 3-3Measurements Types ............................................................................................................. 3-4What is Spectrum ................................................................................................................... 3-5RBW ....................................................................................................................................... 3-6VBW ....................................................................................................................................... 3-6RF Attenuation ....................................................................................................................... 3-7

Using Spectrum Analyzer .............................................................................................................. 3-8How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 3-9

Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 3-9ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 3-9Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 3-10Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 3-12BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 3-13

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Marker .................................................................................................................................. 3-14Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 3-15Measure ............................................................................................................................... 3-15Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 3-16Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-18

Cable Connection ........................................................................................................................ 3-19Spectrum Analyzer Input Mode ................................................................................................... 3-20Select Channel Standard ............................................................................................................. 3-21

Select Channel Standard ..................................................................................................... 3-22Spectrum Measurement .............................................................................................................. 3-23

Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display .................................................................................... 3-24Spectrum Measurement Screen .......................................................................................... 3-25

Channel Power Measurement ..................................................................................................... 3-26Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-26Channel Power Measurement Screen ................................................................................. 3-27

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ............................................................................................ 3-28Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-28Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ......................................................................... 3-29

SEM Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 3-30Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-30SEM Measurement Screen .................................................................................................. 3-31

ACP Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 3-32Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-32ACP Measurement Screen .................................................................................................. 3-33

AM/FM Measurement .................................................................................................................. 3-34Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-34

4.0 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER ................................................................................................................. 4-1Interference Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................ 4-2

Spectrogram ........................................................................................................................... 4-3Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) ............................................................................ 4-3

How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 4-4Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 4-4ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 4-4Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 4-4Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 4-5Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 4-7BW/AVG ................................................................................................................................. 4-7Marker .................................................................................................................................... 4-8Peak Search ........................................................................................................................... 4-9Measure ................................................................................................................................. 4-9Measure Setup ....................................................................................................................... 4-9Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-10

Cable Connection ........................................................................................................................ 4-12Making Measurements ................................................................................................................ 4-13

Spectrogram ......................................................................................................................... 4-14RSSI ..................................................................................................................................... 4-15

5.0 CHANNEL SCANNER .......................................................................................................................... 5-1Channel Scanner Introduction ....................................................................................................... 5-2How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 5-3

Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 5-3ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 5-3Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 5-3Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 5-4BW/AVG ................................................................................................................................. 5-4Marker .................................................................................................................................... 5-5Peak Search ........................................................................................................................... 5-5Measure ................................................................................................................................. 5-5Measure setup ....................................................................................................................... 5-5Display Overview (General Channel Scanner ) ..................................................................... 5-6Display Overview (GSM Channel Scanner) ........................................................................... 5-7

Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................... 5-8Making Measurements .................................................................................................................. 5-9

General Channel Scanner ................................................................................................... 5-10GSM Channel scanner ......................................................................................................... 5-10

6.0 CDMA TX ANALYZER ........................................................................................................................ 6-1CDMA Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................... 6-2

3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Concept of Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................. 6-3Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concepts ............................................................ 6-3Code Domain Measurement Concepts .................................................................................. 6-4Spurious Emission Measurement Concepts .......................................................................... 6-5ACPR Measurement Concepts .............................................................................................. 6-5

Using CDMA Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 6-6How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 6-7

Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 6-7Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 6-7Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 6-9BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 6-11Marker .................................................................................................................................. 6-12Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 6-13Measure ............................................................................................................................... 6-13Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 6-14Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 6-15Setup .................................................................................................................................... 6-16

Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 6-16External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 6-17

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 6-18Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 6-19Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 6-19

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 6-20Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 6-20Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 6-21

ACPR Measurement ............................................................................................................ 6-22ACPR Procedure .......................................................................................................... 6-23ACPR Screen ................................................................................................................ 6-24

Spurious Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ................................................................... 6-25SEM Procedure ............................................................................................................. 6-25SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 6-26

CDMA Code Domain Measurement ..................................................................................... 6-27CDP Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 6-27CDP Screen .................................................................................................................. 6-28cdma2000 CDP Measurement Items ............................................................................ 6-29

CDMA OTA Measurement .................................................................................................... 6-30OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 6-30OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 6-31

7.0 EVDO TX ANALYZER ........................................................................................................................ 7-1EVDO Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................... 7-2

1xEV-DO Forward Link .......................................................................................................... 7-3Frame Structure ..................................................................................................................... 7-3Channel Power Measurement Concepts ............................................................................... 7-4Code Domain (Forward Link) Measurement Concepts ......................................................... 7-4Modulation Accuracy (Waveform Quality) Measurement Concepts ...................................... 7-5Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concepts ....................................................................... 7-6Spurious Emissions and Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Concepts ......................... 7-6

Using EVDO Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 7-8How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 7-9

Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 7-9Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 7-9Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 7-11BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 7-13Marker .................................................................................................................................. 7-14Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 7-15Measure ............................................................................................................................... 7-16Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 7-16Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 7-17Setup .................................................................................................................................... 7-18

Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 7-18External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 7-19Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification ............................................................................ 7-20

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 7-20Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 7-21Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 7-21

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 7-22

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 7-22Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 7-23

Spurious Emission Mask Measurement ............................................................................... 7-24SEM Procedure ............................................................................................................. 7-24SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 7-24

ACPR Measurement ............................................................................................................ 7-25ACPR Procedure .......................................................................................................... 7-25ACPR Screen ................................................................................................................ 7-25

Code Domain Power ............................................................................................................ 7-26EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement ............................................................................. 7-26EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement ............................................................................ 7-26EV-DO Traffic Channel Measurement .......................................................................... 7-26CDP Procedure ............................................................................................................. 7-27EV-DO Pilot Channel CDP ............................................................................................ 7-28EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement Parameters ......................................................... 7-29EV-DO MAC Channel CDP ........................................................................................... 7-29EV-DO MAC Channel CDP Screen .............................................................................. 7-30EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters ........................................................ 7-30Required Specification for EV-DO MAC Channel ......................................................... 7-31EV-DO Data Channel Measurement ............................................................................. 7-31EV-DO Data Channel Measurement Screen ................................................................ 7-32EV-DO Traffic CDP Measurement Parameters ............................................................ 7-32Required Specification for EV-DO Traffic Channel ....................................................... 7-33

8.0 WCDMA TX ANALYZER .................................................................................................................... 8-1WCDMA Analyzer Introduction ...................................................................................................... 8-2

What is WCDMA .................................................................................................................... 8-3Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 8-4Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concept ......................................................................... 8-4Spurious Emission Mask Measurement Concept .................................................................. 8-5ACLR Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 8-5Code Domain Measurement Concept .................................................................................... 8-6Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concept .............................................................. 8-6

Using WCDMA Analyzer ................................................................................................................ 8-7How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 8-8

Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 8-8Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 8-8Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 8-10BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 8-12Marker .................................................................................................................................. 8-13Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 8-14Measure ............................................................................................................................... 8-15Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 8-15Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 8-16Setup .................................................................................................................................... 8-17

Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 8-17External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 8-18

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 8-20Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 8-20Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 8-21

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 8-21Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 8-22Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 8-22

Spurious Emission Measurement ........................................................................................ 8-23SEM Procedure ............................................................................................................. 8-23SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 8-24

ACLR Measurement ............................................................................................................. 8-24ACLR Procedure ........................................................................................................... 8-25ACLR Screen ................................................................................................................ 8-25

Code Domain Analysis (Demodulator) ................................................................................. 8-26CDP Procedure ............................................................................................................. 8-26CDP Screen .................................................................................................................. 8-27

WCDMA OTA Measurement ................................................................................................ 8-28OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 8-28OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 8-29

9.0 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER ............................................................................................................... 9-1GSM/EDGE Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................ 9-2

5 TABLE OF CONTENTS

What is GSM .......................................................................................................................... 9-3Time Slot ................................................................................................................................ 9-4Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 9-4Spurious Emission Measurement Concept ............................................................................ 9-4Code Domain Measurement Concept (Demodulator) ........................................................... 9-5Phase & Frequency Error Measurement Concept ................................................................. 9-5Baseband I/Q Measurement Concept .................................................................................... 9-6

Using GSM/EDGE Tx Analyzer ..................................................................................................... 9-7How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 9-8

Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 9-8Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 9-8Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 9-10BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 9-11Marker .................................................................................................................................. 9-12Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 9-13Measure ............................................................................................................................... 9-13Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 9-14Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 9-15Setup .................................................................................................................................... 9-16

Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 9-16External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 9-17

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-19Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 9-19Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 9-20

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 9-21Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 9-21Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 9-22

Spurious Emissions Measurement ....................................................................................... 9-23SEM Procedure ............................................................................................................. 9-23SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 9-23

Power vs. Time Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-24PvT Procedure .............................................................................................................. 9-24PvT Screens ................................................................................................................. 9-25

I/Q Polar Vector Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-26I/Q Polar Vector Procedure ........................................................................................... 9-26I/Q Polar Vector Screen ................................................................................................ 9-27

I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement .................................................................................... 9-28I/Q Demodulated Bits Procedure .................................................................................. 9-28I/Q Demodulated Bits Screen ....................................................................................... 9-29

GSM OTA Measurement ...................................................................................................... 9-30OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 9-30OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 9-31

10.0 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER ........................................................................................................... 10-1TD-SCDMA Analyzer Introduction ............................................................................................... 10-2

Frame Structure ................................................................................................................... 10-3Time Slot .............................................................................................................................. 10-4DwPTS ................................................................................................................................. 10-5UpPTS .................................................................................................................................. 10-5GP ........................................................................................................................................ 10-5FDD vs. TDD ........................................................................................................................ 10-5

Using TD-SCDMA Tx Analyzer .................................................................................................... 10-6How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 10-7

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 10-7Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 10-7Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 10-9BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................. 10-10Marker ................................................................................................................................ 10-10Peak Search ....................................................................................................................... 10-12Measure ............................................................................................................................. 10-12Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 10-13Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 10-16Setup .................................................................................................................................. 10-17

Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................ 10-17External Clock Setting ................................................................................................ 10-18

Channel Power Measurement ........................................................................................... 10-19Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................... 10-19

6 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................... 10-20Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ................................................................................... 10-21

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................. 10-21Occupied Bandwidth Screen ...................................................................................... 10-22

Spectrum Emissions Measurement ................................................................................... 10-23SEM Procedure ........................................................................................................... 10-23SEM Screen ................................................................................................................ 10-23

ACLR Measurement ........................................................................................................... 10-24ACLR Procedure ......................................................................................................... 10-24ACLR Screen .............................................................................................................. 10-24

Power vs. Time Measurement ........................................................................................... 10-25P vs T Procedure ........................................................................................................ 10-25P vs T Screens ............................................................................................................ 10-26

Code Domain Power (Demodulator) .................................................................................. 10-28CDP Procedure ........................................................................................................... 10-28Code Power Screens .................................................................................................. 10-29

11.0 CABLE & ANTENNA ANALYZER ...................................................................................................... 11-1Cable and Antenna Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................... 11-2

Standing Wave Ratio ............................................................................................................ 11-3Practical implications of SWR .............................................................................................. 11-3Return loss ........................................................................................................................... 11-4DTF ...................................................................................................................................... 11-5Cable Loss ........................................................................................................................... 11-5

Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer ............................................................................................. 11-6How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 11-7

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 11-7Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 11-7Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-8BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 11-9Marker .................................................................................................................................. 11-9Peak Search ....................................................................................................................... 11-10Measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-10Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 11-10

VSWR ......................................................................................................................................... 11-11VSWR Display ..................................................................................................................... 11-11Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-13Setting Trace Point ............................................................................................................. 11-19Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-19Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-19Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................. 11-20DTF Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-21

DTF ............................................................................................................................................ 11-21DTF Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-21DTF Setup .......................................................................................................................... 11-23Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-28Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-28Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................. 11-30

Cable Loss (One Port Measurement) ....................................................................................... 11-31Cable Loss Display ............................................................................................................ 11-31Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-33Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-37Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-37Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................. 11-37

Gain/Loss (Two Ports Measurement) ........................................................................................ 11-39Gain/Loss Display .............................................................................................................. 11-39Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-41Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-46Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-46Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................. 11-47

12.0 POWER METER ............................................................................................................................. 12-1Power Meter Introduction ............................................................................................................ 12-2Using RF Power Meter ................................................................................................................ 12-3How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 12-4

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 12-4Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 12-5Cable Connection ................................................................................................................. 12-6

7 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Connecting Sensor ............................................................................................................... 12-7Measurement Procedure (internal) ...................................................................................... 12-9

Making Power Measurement ...................................................................................................... 12-9Measurement Procedure (using external power sensors) ................................................. 12-10Measurement Results ........................................................................................................ 12-11

13.0 E1 ANALYZER ............................................................................................................................... 13-1E1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 13-2

E1 Standard ......................................................................................................................... 13-3G.703/G.704 Framing ........................................................................................................... 13-3E1 Frame Structure .............................................................................................................. 13-4E1 vs. T1 .............................................................................................................................. 13-4E1 Pulse ............................................................................................................................... 13-5E1 Physicals ......................................................................................................................... 13-6Framing ................................................................................................................................ 13-7Line Code ............................................................................................................................. 13-7CRC-4 Error Detection ......................................................................................................... 13-8Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 13-9

Using E1 Analyzer ..................................................................................................................... 13-11How to Use Keys ....................................................................................................................... 13-12

Measure ............................................................................................................................. 13-12Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 13-12Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 13-14

Measurement Setup .................................................................................................................. 13-15Connection Diagram .......................................................................................................... 13-16Terminate Mode ................................................................................................................. 13-17Bridge Mode ....................................................................................................................... 13-17Monitor Mode ..................................................................................................................... 13-17Loop Test ............................................................................................................................ 13-17

14.0 T1 ANALYZER ............................................................................................................................... 14-1T1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 14-2

T1 Bandwidth ....................................................................................................................... 14-3T1 Framing ........................................................................................................................... 14-3Line Code ............................................................................................................................. 14-4Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 14-6Physical Interface ................................................................................................................. 14-8

Using T1 Analyzer ....................................................................................................................... 14-9How to Use Keys ....................................................................................................................... 14-10

Measure ............................................................................................................................. 14-10Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 14-10Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 14-13

Measurement Setup .................................................................................................................. 14-14Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................. 14-15Terminate Mode ......................................................................................................................... 14-16Bridge Mode .............................................................................................................................. 14-16Monitor Mode ............................................................................................................................ 14-16Loop Test ................................................................................................................................... 14-16

15.0 APPENDIX ..................................................................................................................................... 15-1APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 15-2APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................... 15-4APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST .............................................................................................................. 15-5APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD ................................................................. 15-7APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE ............................................................... 15-8ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 15-9

8 LIST OF FIGURES

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1 – Overview of Spectrum Analyzer Display ............................................................. 3-18Figure 2 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection ........................................................ 3-19Figure 3 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection ............................................................ 3-19Figure 4 – Example of Spectrum Measurement Screen ...................................................... 3-25Figure 5 – Example of Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................ 3-27Figure 6 – Example of Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen .................................... 3-29Figure 7 – Example of SEM Measurement Screen ............................................................. 3-31Figure 8 – Example of ACP Measurement Screen .............................................................. 3-33Figure 9 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (Spectrogram) ................................. 4-10Figure 10 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (RSSI) ........................................... 4-11Figure 11 – Connection for Interference Analyzer ............................................................... 4-12Figure 12 – Overview of General Channel Scanner Display ................................................. 5-6Figure 13 – Overview of GSM Channel Scanner Display ...................................................... 5-7Figure 14 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection ........................................................ 5-8Figure 15 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection ............................................................ 5-8Figure 16 – Overview of CDMA Tx Analyzer Display ........................................................... 6-15Figure 17 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 6-17Figure 18 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................ 6-19Figure 19 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ................................... 6-21Figure 20 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Screen ........................................................... 6-24Figure 21 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Screen ...................................................... 6-26Figure 22 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Screen ............................................................. 6-28Figure 23 – CDMA OTA Measurement Screen .................................................................... 6-31Figure 24 – 1xEv-DO Forward Link Structure ........................................................................ 7-3Figure 25 – Overview of 1xEVDO Tx Analyzer Display ....................................................... 7-17Figure 26 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 7-19Figure 27 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Screen .................................................. 7-21Figure 28 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen .......................................... 7-23Figure 29 – EVDO Emission Measurement Screen ............................................................ 7-24Figure 30 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Screen ................................................................. 7-25Figure 31 – 1xEV-DO Pilot CDP Measurement Result ........................................................ 7-28Figure 32 – 1xEV-DO MAC CDP Measurement Result ....................................................... 7-30Figure 33 – 1xEV-DO Data Measurement Result (Idle Slot) ............................................... 7-32Figure 34 – Overview of WCDMA Tx Analyzer Display ....................................................... 8-16Figure 35 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 8-18Figure 36 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................... 8-21Figure 37 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ...................................... 8-22Figure 38 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Screen .......................................... 8-24Figure 39 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Screen .............................................................. 8-25Figure 40 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Full Screen ................................................... 8-27Figure 41 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Zoomed Screen ............................................ 8-27Figure 42 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Screen ................................................................ 8-29Figure 43 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display ............................................................. 9-15Figure 44 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 9-17Figure 45 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Screen ......................................... 9-20Figure 46 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ................................. 9-22Figure 47 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Screen .......................................................... 9-23Figure 48 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen .............................................. 9-25Figure 49 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen .......................................... 9-25Figure 50 – GSM Polar Vector Measurement Screen ......................................................... 9-27Figure 51 – EDGE Polar Vector Measurement Screen ....................................................... 9-27Figure 52 – GSM Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen ................................................. 9-29Figure 53 – EDGE Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen ............................................... 9-29Figure 54 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................... 9-31Figure 55 – TD-SCDMA Frame Structure ............................................................................ 10-3Figure 56 – TD-SCDMA Resource Structure ....................................................................... 10-4Figure 57 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display ........................................................... 10-16Figure 58 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports ................................................................................ 10-18Figure 59 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen ........................................ 10-20Figure 60 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ............................... 10-22

9 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 61 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen ......................................................... 10-23Figure 62 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen ......................................................... 10-24Figure 63 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen ............................................. 10-26Figure 64 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen ......................................... 10-26Figure 65 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Mask) Measurement Screen .......................................... 10-27Figure 66 – TD-SCDMA Code Power Measurement Screen ............................................. 10-29Figure 67 – TD-SCDMA Midamble Power Measurement Screen ..................................... 10-29Figure 68 – TD-SCDMA Symbol Data Measurement Screen ............................................ 10-30Figure 69 – TD-SCDMA Code Error Measurement Screen ............................................... 10-30Figure 70 – TD-SCDMA Constellation Measurement Screen ............................................ 10-31Figure 71 – VSWR Measurement Screen Display .............................................................. 11-11Figure 72 – Calibration for VSWR measurement .............................................................. 11-15Figure 73 – Calibration using extension cable ................................................................... 11-16Figure 74 – Connection for VSWR Measurement ............................................................. 11-18Figure 75 – Using Markers in VSWR Measurement Mode ................................................ 11-20Figure 76 – Limit Line Application ...................................................................................... 11-20Figure 77 – DTF Measurement Screen Display ................................................................ 11-21Figure 78 – Calibration for DTF measurement .................................................................. 11-25Figure 79 – Connection Diagram for DTF Measurement ................................................... 11-27Figure 80 – Using Markers in DTF Measurement Mode .................................................... 11-28Figure 81 – DTF Measurement in VSWR scale ................................................................. 11-29Figure 82 – DTF Measurement in Return Loss scale ........................................................ 11-29Figure 83 – Using Limit Line in DTF Measurement ........................................................... 11-30Figure 84 – Cable Loss Measurement Screen Display ..................................................... 11-31Figure 85 – Port Calibration for One Port Cable Loss Measurement ................................ 11-34Figure 86 – One Port Cable Loss Measurement Connection Diagram ............................. 11-36Figure 87 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ........................................ 11-37Figure 88 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ...................................... 11-38Figure 89 – Gain/Loss Measurement Screen Display ....................................................... 11-39Figure 90 – Two Ports Calibration for Gain/Loss Measurement ........................................ 11-42Figure 91 – Two Ports Gain/Loss Measurement Diagram ................................................. 11-44Figure 92 – Two Ports Gain Measurement w/+30dB Attenuator ....................................... 11-45Figure 93 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ........................................ 11-46Figure 94 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ...................................... 11-47Figure 95 – Power Meter Screen ......................................................................................... 12-5Figure 96 – Connection Diagram (Direct Connection) ......................................................... 12-6Figure 97 – Connection Diagram (Indirect Connection) ...................................................... 12-6Figure 98 – Power Sensor Connection (Terminating Type) ................................................. 12-7Figure 99 – Power Sensor Connection (Directional Type) ................................................... 12-8Figure 100 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Abs) .............................................. 12-11Figure 101 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Rel) ............................................... 12-12Figure 102 – E1 Frame Structure ......................................................................................... 13-4Figure 103 – Mask of the Pulse at 2.048 Mbps Interface .................................................... 13-5Figure 104 – AMI & HDB3 Line Coding ............................................................................... 13-8Figure 105 – E1 Analyzer Screen ...................................................................................... 13-14Figure 106 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis ................................................ 13-16Figure 107 – T1 Bandwidth .................................................................................................. 14-3Figure 108 – D4 Frame Format ........................................................................................... 14-4Figure 109 – AMI Encoding .................................................................................................. 14-5Figure 110 – B8ZS Encoded Signal ..................................................................................... 14-6Figure 111 – Typical T1 Cabling ........................................................................................... 14-8Figure 112 – T1 Analyzer Screen ....................................................................................... 14-13Figure 113 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis ................................................ 14-15

10 LIST OF TABLES

LIST OF TABLES Table 1 – Input Power Requirements ..................................................................................... 1-6Table 2 – JD7105A Accessory List ......................................................................................... 2-3Table 3 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 2-10Table 4 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 3-10Table 5 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio ............................................................ 3-13Table 6 – Select Channel Standard ...................................................................................... 3-22Table 7 – Spectrum Measurement Procedure ..................................................................... 3-23Table 8 – Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display .................................................................... 3-24Table 9 – Channel Power Measurement Procedure ............................................................ 3-26Table 10 – Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure .................................................. 3-28Table 11 – SEM Measurement Procedure ........................................................................... 3-30Table 12 – ACP Measurement Procedure ............................................................................ 3-32Table 13 – AM/FM Measurement Procedure ....................................................................... 3-34Table 11 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 4-5Table 12 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio ............................................................ 4-7Table 16 – Interference Analysis in Spectrogram View ........................................................ 4-14Table 17 – Interference Analysis in RSSI View .................................................................... 4-15Table 18 – General Channel Scanner .................................................................................. 5-10Table 19 – GSM Channel Scanner ...................................................................................... 5-10Table 20 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 6-8Table 21 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ....................................................................... 6-16Table 22 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 6-17Table 23 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 6-18Table 24 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Procedure ........................................ 6-19Table 25 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ................................ 6-20Table 26 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Procedure ....................................................... 6-23Table 27 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Procedure .................................................. 6-25Table 28 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Procedure ......................................................... 6-27Table 29 – CDMA OTA Measurement Procedure ................................................................ 6-30Table 30 – Ref Level Setting Procedure .............................................................................. 7-10Table 32 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ....................................................................... 7-18Table 32 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 7-19Table 33 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 7-20Table 34 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Procedure ............................................... 7-21Table 35 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ...................................... 7-22Table 36 – EVDO Emission Measurement Procedure ......................................................... 7-24Table 37 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Procedure .............................................................. 7-25Table 38 – 1xEV-DO CDP Measurement Procedure ........................................................... 7-27Table 39 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 8-9Table 40 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer ........................................................................ 8-17Table 41 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 8-18Table 42 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 8-19Table 43 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure ........................................... 8-20Table 44 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ................................... 8-22Table 45 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Procedure ...................................... 8-23Table 46 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure .......................................................... 8-25Table 47 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Procedure ....................................................... 8-26Table 48 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Procedure ............................................................. 8-28Table 49 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 9-9Table 50 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer ........................................................................ 9-16Table 51 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 9-17Table 52 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 9-18Table 53 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Procedure ..................................... 9-19Table 54 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ............................. 9-21Table 55 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Procedure ...................................................... 9-23Table 56 – GSM/EDGE P vs T Measurement Procedure .................................................... 9-24Table 57 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Polar Vector Measurement Procedure ..................................... 9-26Table 58 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement Procedure ............................ 9-28Table 59 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Procedure ....................................................... 9-30Table 60 – FDD and TDD component comparison .............................................................. 10-5

LIST OF TABLES 11

Table 61 – Ref Level Setting Procedure .............................................................................. 10-8Table 62 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ..................................................................... 10-17Table 63 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................. 10-18Table 64 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ......................................................................... 10-19Table 65 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure .................................... 10-19Table 66 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ............................ 10-21Table 67 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Procedure ..................................................... 10-23Table 68 – TD-SCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure ................................................... 10-24Table 69 – TD-SCDMA P vs T Measurement Procedure ................................................... 10-25Table 70 – TD-SCDMA Demodulator Measurement Procedure ........................................ 10-28Table 71 – Frequency Setting Procedure ........................................................................... 11-13Table 72 – Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................... 11-17Table 73 – DTF Setup Procedure ...................................................................................... 11-24Table 74 – Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................... 11-26Table 75 – Frequency Setting Procedure ........................................................................... 11-33Table 76 – Port Calibration Procedure for Cable Loss Measurement ............................... 11-35Table 77 – Cable Loss Measurement Procedure ............................................................... 11-36Table 78 – Frequency Setting Procedure ........................................................................... 11-41Table 79 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement .................................... 11-43Table 80 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement .................................... 11-44Table 81 – Types of Power Sensors .................................................................................... 12-7Table 82 – Power Measurement Procedure w/ Internal Power Meter ................................. 12-9Table 83 – RF Power Measurement Using External Power Sensor .................................. 12-10Table 84 – E1 vs. T1 ............................................................................................................ 13-4Table 85 – ITU-T G.703 2.048 Mbps Pulse Mask Specifications ......................................... 13-6Table 86 – E1 Analysis Procedure ..................................................................................... 13-15Table 87 – B8ZS Encoding .................................................................................................. 14-5Table 88 – T1 Analysis Procedure ..................................................................................... 14-14

This page intentionally left blank.

CH

1

INTRODUCTION 1-2

Chapter 1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

In this chapter

Overview....................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

JD7105A ............................................................................................................................................... 1-3 JD7105A Highlights ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Advantage ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Applicable Systems .............................................................................................................................. 1-4

Safety Information ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5 Safety Symbol ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5 Safety Consideration ............................................................................................................................ 1-5 Input Power .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions (ESD) .......................................................................................... 1-7

CH

1

1-3 INTRODUCTION

Chapter 1

JD7105A

OVERVIEW JD7105A Mobile Communication Service Providers face the critical need for

reduction of field maintenance and operating cost to deal with ever

increasing competition in the wireless service industry. The JD7105A is the

solution to this need by integrating all the functions to diagnose base

stations in a single field portable test solution. The JD7105A makes

service and maintenance activities on base station easier, simpler and

faster by performing all complicated test and measurement processes

through just a few key strokes.

JD7105A Base Station

Analyzer

CH

1

INTRODUCTION 1-4

Chapter 1

ADVANTAGE

FUNCTIONS

APPLICABLE SYSTEMS

JD7105A HIGHLIGHTS ADVANTAGE The JD7105A is an ‘integrated’ measurement solution that can be

operated either by external AC power or by its internal battery for field

applications.

The JD7105A user interface has been specifically designed for service

providers with customized menus and simple calibration procedures

enabling accurate and reliable measurement results.

FUNCTIONS Spectrum Analyzer

Transmission Analyzer

Cable & Antenna Analyzer

RF Power Meter

E1/T1 Analyzer

Interference Analyzer

Channel Scanner

Auto Measurement

APPLICABLE SYSTEMS cdmaOne

cdma2000

1xEV-DO

WCDMA/HSDPA

GSM/GPRS/EDGE

TD-SCDMA

CH

1

1-5 INTRODUCTION

Chapter 1

SAFETY SYMBOL

Warning

Caution

Notice

SAFETY CONSIDERATION

SAFETY INFORMATION SAFETY SYMBOL The following symbols must be observed for the proper operation of the

instrument.

WARNING denotes a hazard. It calls for attention to a procedure or

practice which if not performed correctly could result in a personal injury.

Do not proceed beyond a WARNING indication until all the conditions are

fully understood and met.

CAUTION denotes a caution. It calls for attention to a procedure or

practice which, if not performed correctly could result in a partial or totally

damage of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION indication

until all the conditions are fully understood and met.

NOTICE denotes additional information or direction of operation of the

instrument.

SAFETY CONSIDERATION This product is a Safety Class I product. The main power plug shall

only be inserted in a power socket outlet provided with a protective

ground terminal.

Only the supplied AC/DC power adaptor shall be used. JDSU is not

liable for any personal injury or product damage caused by using a

different power supply.

Removal of internal or external protective cover may cause

personal injury or damage to the instrument. JDSU is not liable for

any incident caused by unauthorized removal of such protective parts.

!

CH

1

INTRODUCTION 1-6

Chapter 1

INPUT POWER

There is no need to select the input voltage within the tolerable input line

voltage range (AC 110 ~ 250V). The instrument doesn’t have a separate

line protection fuse.

Table 1 – Input Power Requirements

Only the AC/DC power adaptor supplied with the instrument shall

be used. JDSU is not liable for any damage to the product

caused by using a different power supply.

Always use three prong AC power cord supplied with this

instrument. Failure to ensure adequate grounding by not using

this power cord may cause personal injury/or product damage.

The battery installed in this instrument is Lithium-Ion and it may

lead to explosion if not connected correctly. In case the battery

needs to be exchanged, it must be of the same type or

compatible. The disposal of batteries must be done following accordingly

to safety and environmental regulations.

Item Specification

Adaptor Input Voltage & Frequency 100 ~ 250V AC, 47 ~ 66 Hz

Power Consumption Warm up < 75W

Operation < 80W

!

!

CH

1

1-7 INTRODUCTION

Chapter 1

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE PRECAUTIONS (ESD)

This instrument was manufactured in an ESD protected environment.

Semiconductor devices used in this product are susceptible to damage by

static discharge. Depending on the magnitude of the discharge,

semiconductor devices may be damaged by direct contact or mere

proximity of a static charge. This may cause performance degradation,

early failure or immediate destruction. Please use the following guidelines

to prevent ESD damage.

Before connecting the cable to the JD7105A terminal, short circuit the

center of the cable with an outside metal shield.

Before removing the connected cables or getting in contact with the

center pin, wear a wrist strap with 1 MΩ resistor connected to the

ground.

All equipment must be connected to the ground to avoid the

accumulation of static charges.

CH

2

2-1 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

2.0 GETTING STARTED

In this chapter

Unpacking the JD7105A ............................................................................................................................... 2-2 JD7105A Standard Accessories .................................................................................................................... 2-3 Layout & Hard/Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Front View .................................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Power Switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6 Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6 ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Save ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Load ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 System .................................................................................................................................................. 2-7 Data Entry Key ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 2-9 Amplitude ............................................................................................................................................ 2-10 Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 2-12 BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 2-13 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 2-13 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 2-14 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 2-15 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 2-17

Top View ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-18 RF In ................................................................................................................................................... 2-19 DC 15V ~ 19V In ................................................................................................................................. 2-19 RF Out ................................................................................................................................................ 2-19 External In .......................................................................................................................................... 2-19 SYS I/O ............................................................................................................................................... 2-19 E1/T1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2-20 Grip ....................................................................................................................................... 2-20

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-2

Chapter 2

UNPACKING THE JD7105A

Unpack and inspect the shipping container thoroughly to ensure that

nothing was damaged during shipment.

If the contents are damaged or defective, contact your nearest JDSU's

authorized sales and service office. Keep the shipping materials for

carrier’s inspection.

Verify that all the parts were included in the shipping container. The basic

test set package for the JD7105A includes:

JD7105A, Base Station Analyzer

Soft-Carrying Case

1GByte USB Memory

User’s Manual (CD-ROM)

Certificate of Calibration

Stylus Pen

Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (Built-in)

AC/DC Adaptor (AC 110/220V -> DC19V)

Power Cable

LAN Cross-Over Cable (1.5m long, CAT5)

CH

2

2-3GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

JD7105A STANDARD ACCESSORIES

Part No Picture Q’ty Description

JD71050341

1 Soft Carrying Case

G710450313

1 1GB USB Memory

G710550361

1 User’s Manual (CD-ROM)

G710550365

1 Certificate of Calibration

Sheet

G710550316

1 Stylus Pen

G710550321

1 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack

(Built-in)

G710550322

1 AC/DC Power Adapter with

Power Cable

G710550335

1 LAN Cross Over Cable

(1.5m long, CAT5)

Table 2 – JD7105A Accessory List

NOTE:

Refer to the “Ordering Information” for optional accessories.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-4

Chapter 2

LAYOUT

LAYOUT & HARD/SOFT KEYS

CH

2

2-5GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

FRONT VIEW

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-6

Chapter 2

POWER SWITCH

MODE

SOFT KEYS ESC

SAVE

It powers the JD7105A on and off; when the JD7105A is on the green LED

is lit. When the external power is connected, through the AC/DC adaptor,

the red LED is lit.

The mode key is used to select the major functions of the JD7105A such

as Spectrum Analyzer, TX Analyzer, Antenna/Cable Analyzer, Power Meter,

and E1/T1 Analyzer.

Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,

or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption

to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same menu layer but

cannot be displayed on one screen, a “More” or “” key on the bottom

corner will be displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.

The ESC key is used to move to the previous menu without changing the

current setup.

Measurement results can be saved either as graphic files or as data files.

All measurement results can be saved as graphic files. Spectrum

measurement results can also be saved as data files.

SAVE SCREEN: Saves current screen in a JPEG file. The file name can

be assigned by the user. If the file name is not assigned by the user, then

the instrument will automatically assign it based on the measurement

mode and the measurement time.

SAVE TRACE: Saves a captured trace in a data file. The file name

extension is *.tra. The user setup (Input Attenuation, RBW, VBW, offset,

Average, etc.). however not saved.

SAVE STATUS: This function saves the user setup configuration and the

calibration data. Up to 20 setups can be saved.

SAVE TO: Selects where the information will be saved, either into the

internal memory or into the external USB memory.

CH

2

2-7 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

LOAD

SYSTEM

LOAD SCREEN: This function recalls and displays a saved screen. The

active measurement continues to be measured, but it is not displayed on

the screen. Pressing any key removes the loaded screen and the active

measurement is displayed.

LOAD TRACE: This function is used to recall multiple traces for

comparison purposes.

When the instrument is in Cable and Antenna Analyzer mode, the

following changes happen automatically when a saved trace is recalled:

The frequency or distance setting of the current measurement mode

is changed automatically to fit into the recalled trace. On the upper

right corner of the screen, the frequency setting and the assigned

Trace number (Trace CH) of the recalled trace are displayed.

The Y scale unit is adjusted automatically to fit into the Y scale of the

recalled trace.

A second trace can be recalled, but it may not be loaded if its start

and stop points of the X scale are not identical to those of the first

loaded trace.

The trace with a different Y scale may not be seen on the screen even

if the trace information appears on the trace summary table on the

upper right corner of the display. When multiple traces with different Y

scale are loaded, the corresponding trace with the current Y scale is

only shown on the screen.

The System key enables users to verify the system information or to

change the instrument settings.

FREQ REF: Sets the Frequency References to improve measurement

accuracy. The Frequency reference can be selected as Internal, Ext

10MHz, Ext 13MHz, or Ext 15MHz.

TIME REF: Sets the Timing Reference. Time references can be selected

as Internal, External or GPS.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-8

Chapter 2

LICENSE MANAGER: The JD7105A License Manager is a menu used to

select optional modules, which are activated by entering the

corresponding license number.

SELECT LICENSE: Select optional module to be licensed.

LICENSE CODE: Enter license code to enable selected optional

module.

DATE/TIME: Sets the time of the system clock.

ETHERNET CONFIG: Sets the instrument IP Address, Net Mask, and

Gateway for Ethernet communication.

SOUND: Activates or deactivates the beep sound when keys are pressed.

UPGRADE: Upgrades the firmware of the instrument.

LANGUAGE: Changes the language used of the instrument’s menu,

messages and information on the screen display.

SCREEN SAVER: Sets the time to enter into power saving mode. Power

saving mode is automatically activated when no key entry occurs during

the Sleep Time.

Sleep Time setting range: 1~200 minutes.

Power saving mode is turned off when Sleep Time is set to 0.

BRIGHTNESS: This key is used to adjust the brightness of the LCD

display. Adjustment can be made from 0 to 100% and the default setting is

30%.

FILE MANAGER: File manager provides following menu to copy or delete

the data of the instrument.

DELETE: Delete the selected file.

DELETE ALL: Delete all files saved in the instrument.

COPY TO USB: Copy the selected file to USB memory device.

COPY ALL TO USB: Copy all files from the instrument to USB

memory device.

CH

2

2-9 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

DATA ENTRY KEY

FREQ/CHAN

KNOB, The knob is used to allow incremental value changes by

predefined steps for settings such as carrier frequency, span, reference

level, attenuation, cable offset, or averaging or to move a marker on the

trace. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the value or moves the

marker to the right and rotating the knob counterclockwise decreases the

value or moves the marker to the left. Incremental step values are set

differently for each function. The incremental step values can be

configured by the user.

ARROW, The arrow keys increases or decreases active function values. It

works similar as the knob, but it allows a more precise control.

DATA ENTRY, Data entry keys are used to enter values for many test

parameters. The value entered by the user is displayed on the screen and

the location of the display can be changed by the Display function.

DEL key is used to delete the entered values. Every time the DEL key is

pressed, it deletes the last value entered. DEL can’t remove values

entered with the Enter key or Unit key on the screen menu.

ENTER key is used to enter values without a specified unit via the Data

entry key. When the entered value requires a specific unit, soft keys in the

screen are display showing the available units which can be selected by

pressing the corresponding unit soft keys in the screen.

Sets the frequency and selects a standard or custom band.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the Data Entry

key or by rotating the Knob. If the Data Entry key is used the value is

completed by selecting the unit soft key on the screen key. If the knob or

the arrow keys are used the center frequency changes in predefined

frequency steps, which can be configured in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the frequency step value of center frequency. Values

can be entered with the Data Entry key or changed with the knob. If the

Data Entry key is used the value is completed by selecting the unit soft

key on the screen. If the knob is used, the incremental value applied is

0.1MHz.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-10

Chapter 2

AMPLITUDE

CHANNEL STANDARD: A Channel Standard is a list to select "Channel

(number)", not frequency. When the unit is changed to "Chan", then

selects "Channel standard" from the list, the Center Frequency of the

display screen will be mapped according to the selected channel

standard. Selected channel number will be a center frequency within a

channel standard you recalled.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the

graph for optimum display of the traces. Every time the AUTO SCALE key

is pressed, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and

maximum values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum range in the Y axis when using

the spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Table 3 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE/DIV: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it represents

the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default value is

10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to 1dB per

division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by selecting the

Scale Division key.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

CH

2

2-11 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than

the allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the

user (total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over

Power Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and

the JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to

amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,

measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and

Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in

Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement

value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for

the Spectrum mode.

!

!

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-12

Chapter 2

TRACE/DISPLAY

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CH

2

2-13 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

BW/AVG

MARKER

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-14

Chapter 2

PEAK SEARCH

MARKER TABLE:

Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the

bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y

coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the

selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

MARKER :

MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop

frequency of the spectrum.

Each time the Peak Search key is pressed, the Marker is positioned on

the highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the Marker to the highest peak to the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves Marker to the highest peak to the left from its current

position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the Marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the Marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the Marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace every time the trace is refreshed.

CH

2

2-15 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

MEASURE

MEASURE OFF: Turns off the current measurement, when this key is

selected while the instrument is in Tx Analyzer mode, the main mode will

be changed to Spectrum Analyzer mode.

CHANNEL POWER: Channel Power measures the power within 1.23MHz

Bandwidth, and allows the user to set an Integration Bandwidth, Channel

Power Span, and the Average Number.

Measure Setup provides required settings for Channel Power

measurement. Also JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set

each parameter to import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

INTEGRATION BW: Sets the channel power measurement

bandwidth.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH: Occupied bandwidth is calculated as the

bandwidth containing 99% of the transmitted power. It also allows the user

to set the Occupied Bandwidth Power Percentage, Occupied Bandwidth

Span, and Average Number.

Measure Setup provides required settings for Occupied Bandwidth

measurement. Also JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set

each parameter to import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

OCC BW % PWR: Sets the measurement bandwidth in

percentage.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-16

Chapter 2

SEM: Spurious Emission, Emission of a frequency which is outside the

necessary bandwidth and the level of which may be reduced without

affecting the corresponding transmission of the signal.

Measure Setup provides required setting for SEM measurement. Also

JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set each parameter to

import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

ACP: ACP is defined as the ratio between the amount of leakage power in

an adjacent channel and the total transmitted power in the channel.

Measure Setup provided required setting for ACP measurement. Also

JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set each parameter to

import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

AM/FM: The AM/FM demodulator operates using the power received from

radio waves and is designed for providing alternative way to identify

interfering signals.

DEMOD: Turns AM/FM Demodulator On/Off.

DEMOD AT: AM/FM Demodulator uses Marker position to

demodulate. There are 6 markers are available in different

frequencies and user can select the frequency to be

demodulated among M1 to M6.

CH

2

2-17 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

MEASURE SETUP

DEMOD MODE: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be demodulated.

DWELL TIME: Sets interval of AM/FM demodulator. AM/FM

Demodulator demodulates for a period of time set by Dwell Time.

VOLUME: Used to adjust volume.

AUTO GAIN: Used to adjust internal gain of demodulator.

This key has different menus in conjunction with Measure key.

Operation in details will be described in each measurement mode.

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-18

Chapter 2

TOP VIEW

CH

2

2-19 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2

RF IN DC 15V ~ 19V IN RF OUT EXTERNAL IN

SYS I/O

Is a precise 50ohm N-type female connector, used as the input signal port

for spectrum analysis, TX analysis and RF power measurements.

The maximum power for RF In port is +30dBm. If the input

power exceeds the maximum allowable limit, it will degrade the

product performance and in worst case can damage the

instrument. Do not connect any power feed exceeding 1W directly to the

RF input port of the instrument.

DC 15V to 19V input port.

Is a precise 50ohm N-type female connector, used as the output signal

port for Cable and antenna analyzer.

Do not apply or connect power to this RF Out port. If the power

is applied, it will degrade the product performance and in worst

case can damage the product.

GPS: Is a SMA type female connector used for GPS antenna providing

location information and highly accurate reference.

SYNC: Is a SMA type female connector used to receive PP2S clock or

10msec synchronization signals from an external timing reference.

REF: Is a SMA type female connector, used to receive 10MHz, 13MHz, or

15MHz reference clock signals from an external frequency sources.

RS-232C: A serial interface port used to interface with one of the optional

power sensors.

USB: A USB1.1 master port used for external USB memory to extend the

instrument’s storage capability or to upgrade the instrument’s firmware.

Supports most USB memory devices with 32bit file system.

LAN: Ethernet communication port to connect a PC with the application

software.

!

!

CH

2

GETTING STARTED 2-20

Chapter 2

E1/T1

GRIP

E1/T1 input port to detect error or alarm from E1/T1 signal and to transmit

test pattern to E1/T1 transmission line connected through RF-45 cable

provided as an accessory.

A Grip is to carry the instrument for short distance. It is recommended to

use the instrument’s carrying case to move the instrument for long

distance.

CH

3

3-1 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

3.0 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

In this chapter

Spectrum Analyzer Introduction .................................................................................................................... 3-2

Spectrum Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 3-3 Measurements Types ........................................................................................................................... 3-4 What is Spectrum.................................................................................................................................. 3-5 RBW ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 VBW ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 RF Attenuation ...................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Using Spectrum Analyzer ............................................................................................................................. 3-8 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9

Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9 ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9 Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 3-9 Amplitude ............................................................................................................................................ 3-10 Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 3-12 BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 3-13 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 3-15 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 3-16 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 3-18

Cable Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 3-19 Spectrum Analyzer Input Mode ................................................................................................................... 3-20 Select Channel Standard ............................................................................................................................ 3-21

Select Channel Standard .................................................................................................................... 3-22 Spectrum Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-23

Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display ................................................................................................... 3-24 Spectrum Measurement Screen ......................................................................................................... 3-25

Channel Power Measurement .................................................................................................................... 3-26 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-26 Channel Power Measurement Screen ................................................................................................ 3-27

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ............................................................................................................ 3-28 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-28 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ........................................................................................ 3-29

SEM Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 3-30 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-30 SEM Measurement Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-31

ACP Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 3-32 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-32 ACP Measurement Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-33

AM/FM Measurement ................................................................................................................................. 3-34 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-34

CH

3

3-2

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SPECTRUM ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides the basic operation of the Spectrum Analysis

function of the JD7105A, as well as a description of measurements and

procedures when the JD7105A is in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode.

CH

3

3-3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS

In this section, we will define spectrum analysis as well as present a brief

introduction to the types of tests that are made with the spectrum and

signal analyzer functions. In order to make measurements on a signal

analyzer and to interpret the results correctly, it is important to understand

the characteristics of the analyzer.

If you are designing, manufacturing, or doing field service/repair of

electrical devices or systems, you need a tool that will help you analyze

the electrical signals that are passing through or being transmitted by your

system or device. By analyzing the characteristics of the signal once its

gone through the device/system, you can determine the performance, find

problems, troubleshoot, etc.

For these type of measurements it is needed a passive receiver, which it

doesn’t affect the signal, it just displays it in a comprehensive way on the

frequency domain, this is called a spectrum analyzer. Spectrum analyzers

usually display raw, unprocessed signal information such as voltage,

power, period, wave shape, sidebands, and frequency.

Depending on the application, a signal could have several different

characteristics. For example, in communications, in order to send

information such as voice or data, it must be modulated onto a higher

frequency carrier. A modulated signal will have specific characteristics

depending on the type of modulation used. When testing non-linear

devices such as amplifiers or mixers, it is important to understand how

distortion can be created. Understanding the characteristics of noise and

how a noise signal looks compared to other types of signals helps to

analyze devices and/or systems.

Understanding the important aspects of a spectrum analyzer for

measuring all of these types of signals will help you make more accurate

measurements and give you confidence that you are interpreting the

results correctly.

CH

3

3-4

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MEASUREMENTS TYPES

The most common measurements of a spectrum analyzer are modulation,

distortion, and noise. These three terms encompass many different

measurements.

Measuring the quality of the modulation is important for making sure the

system is working properly and that the information is being transmitted

correctly. Understanding the spectral content is important, especially in

communications where there is very limited bandwidth. The amount of

power being transmitted (for example, to overcome the channel

impairments in wireless systems) is another key measurement in

communications. Tests such as error vector magnitude, rho, modulation

quality, and occupied bandwidth are examples of modulation

measurements.

In communications, it is critical to measure distortion for both the receiver

and transmitter. Excessive harmonic distortion at the output of a

transmitter can interfere with other communication bands. The pre-

amplification stages in a receiver must be free of inter-modulation

distortion to prevent signal crosstalk. An example is the inter-modulation of

cable TV carriers that moves down the trunk of the distribution system and

distorts other channels on the same cable. Common distortion

measurements include inter-modulation, harmonics, ACPR, and spurious

emissions.

Noise is the most standard measurement and even the transmitted signal

can be noisy by definition. Any active circuit or device will generate noise.

Tests such as noise figure and signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) are important

for characterizing the performance of a device and/or its contribution to the

overall system noise. Tests on signals that look like noise tend to be

channel power, and occupied bandwidth.

For all of these measurements on the spectrum analyzer mode, it is

important to understand the operation of the spectrum analyzer and the

spectrum analyzer performance requirements for the specific

measurements.

CH

3

3-5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

WHAT IS SPECTRUM

A spectrum is a collection of sine waves that, when properly combined

produces a frequency-domain signal. Displaying complex signals a

frequency-domain provide an indication of its amplitude versus frequency

of each sine wave in the spectrum, making it easy to identify distorted

signals which contain multiple sine waves, as harmonics.

Before we get into the details of describing a spectrum analyzer, we might

first ask ourselves: “Just what is a spectrum and why would we want to

analyze it?” Our normal frame of reference is time. We note when certain

events occur. This includes electrical events. We can use an oscilloscope

to view the instantaneous value of a particular electrical event (or some

other event converted to volts through an appropriate transducer) as a

function of time. In other words, we use the oscilloscope to view the

waveform of a signal in the time domain. Time domain measurements

are also required to identify pulse rise and fall times, overshoot, and

ringing.

Fourier theory explains that any time-domain signal is made up of one or

multiple sine waves of particular frequency, amplitude, and phase. In other

words, we can transform a time-domain signal into its frequency-domain

equivalent. Measurements in the frequency domain tell us how much

energy is present at each particular frequency. If the signal that we wish

to analyze is periodic, as in our case here, Fourier also explains that the

constituent sine waves are separated in the frequency domain by 1/T,

where T is the period of the signal.

The frequency domain measurements provide unique benefits. People

involved in wireless communications are extremely interested in out-of-

band and spurious emissions. For example, cellular radio systems must

be verified for harmonics of the carrier signal that might interfere with other

systems operating at the same frequencies as the harmonics. Engineers

and technicians are also very concerned about distortion of the message

modulated onto a carrier. Third-order intermodulation (two tones of a

complex signal modulating each other) can be particularly troublesome

because the distortion components can fall within the band of interest and

so will not be filtered away.

CH

3

3-6

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

RBW

VBW

The major components in a spectrum analyzer are the RF input attenuator,

mixer, IF (Intermediate Frequency) gain, IF filter, detector, video filter, local

oscillator, sweep generator, and LCD display.

The IF filter is a band pass filter, used as a "window", to detect signals. Its

bandwidth is referred as the analyzer’s resolution bandwidth (RBW) and

can be configured via the front panel of the instrument.

The RBW is used to adjust the vertical position of a signal on the display

without affecting the signal level at the input mixer. When changed, the

value of the reference level is changed accordingly. Since the reference

level should not change (i.e. the vertical position of displayed signals) the

input attenuator also changes, these two components are tied together.

The IF gain will automatically be changed to compensate for input

attenuator changes, so signals remain stationary on the instrument’s

display, and the reference level is not changed.

By providing a broad range of variable resolution bandwidth settings, the

instrument can be optimized for sweep and signal conditions, combining

frequency selectivity (the ability to resolve signals), signal-to-noise ratio

(SNR), and measurement speed.

When the RBW is narrowed, selectivity is improved (resolving both input

signals). This will also improve SNR. The sweep speed and trace update

rate, however, will degrade with a narrower RBWs. The optimum RBW

setting depends heavily on the characteristics of the signals of interest.

The video bandwidth (VBW) consists of a video filter as a low-pass filter

located after the envelope detector. This filter determines the bandwidth of

the video amplifier, and is used to average or smooth the trace displayed

by the instrument.

The spectrum analyzer displays the signal and noise so the closer a signal

is to the noise level; the more difficult is to be identified. By changing the

VBW, the peak-to-peak variations of noise can be decreased.

CH

3

3-7 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

RF ATTENUATION

This type of signal smoothing is used to locate signals that otherwise

might be masked with noise. Changing the VBW does not improve

sensitivity; however, it does improve identification and repeatability when

making low-level measurements.

As a general rule, most field spectrum analyzer measurements are made

at a video bandwidth that is a factor of 10 to 100 less than the resolution

bandwidth. Thus, for a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz, the typical video

bandwidth setting options are either 3 kHz or 300 Hz.

The RF Input Attenuator is a step attenuator located between the input

connector and the first mixer. It is also called the RF attenuator. It is used

to adjust the level of the signal incident upon the first mixer in order to

prevent a mixer gain compression and distortion due to high-level and/or

broadband signals.

An important aspect of the analyzer's internal noise that is often

overlooked is its effective level as a function of the RF input attenuator

setting. Since the internal noise is generated after the mixer, the RF input

attenuator has no effect on the actual noise level. However, the RF input

attenuator does affect the signal level at the input and therefore decreases

the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the analyzer. The best SNR is with the

lowest possible RF input attenuation.

The RF input attenuator and IF gain are tied together, therefore, as the RF

input attenuation is increased by 10 dB, the IF gain will simultaneously

increase by 10 dB to compensate for the loss. As a result the signal

displayed stays constant, but the (amplified) noise level is increases by 10

dB.

CH

3

3-8

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

USING SPECTRUM ANALYZER

The advantage of the Spectrum Analyzer is easy to verify the presence of

unwanted signals such as spurious and harmonics, which is normally very

hard to identify in Time domain analysis. Performance assurance in

wireless communication systems includes the observation of the out-of-

band signal characteristics in order to identify the presence of harmonic

signals. Harmonic signals of a carrier may interfere with other signals far

out of the transmission band, or harmonic signals from other transmitter

may interfere with in band signals affecting the spectral integrity.

In these days when wide variety of wireless communication services are

provided in frequency bands assigned very closely to each other, it is

critical to ensure that each communication service is carried out within

their assigned frequency band minimizing interference with adjacent

frequency bands. So, the Adjacent Channel Power Ratio, ACPR

characteristic of a power amplifier or other RF components is an important

factor in evaluating the system performance.

CH

3

3-9 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

SOFT KEYS ESC FREQ/CHAN

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides a description of the instrument's keys used in the

Spectrum Analyzer mode.

Soft Keys

Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,

or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption

to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but

cannot be displayed, the “More” or “” key on the bottom corner will be

displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.

ESC

The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the

current setup.

Freq/Chan

Sets the frequency band with either standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,

the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is

completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in

predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured

selecting the CF Step Menu.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the

instrument will sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

CH

3

3-10

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

AMPLITUDE

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be

entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data

Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.

When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased

by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: A Channel Standard is a list to select "Channel

(number)", not frequency. When the unit is changed to "Chan", then

selects "Channel standard" from the list, the Center Frequency of the

display screen will be mapped according to the selected Channel standard.

Selected channel number will be a center frequency within a list you

recalled.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values on the Y-axis of the graph for optimum

display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,

the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values

with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum Y-axis range when using the

spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer functions.

Table 4 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE/DIV: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it represents

the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default value is

10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to 1dB per

division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by selecting the

Scale Division key.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values> or rotate

Knob

[dBm]

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key or

Knob (changes by 10dB step)

Select from Screen Menu

CH

3

3-11 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to

amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,

measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and

!

!

CH

3

3-12

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

TRACE/DISPLAY

Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in

Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement

value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for

the Spectrum mode.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CH

3

3-13 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

BW/AVG

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

RBW: Sets the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) of the Spectrum Analyzer.

RBW can be set from 10Hz to 300kHz in 1-3 sequence.

VBW/RBW: Sets proportional VBW based on the designated RBW. For

user’s better understanding of the rather complicated formula, the

following table shows the VBW setting in proportion to the VBW/RBW ratio

at 30kHz RBW setting.

Table 5 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio

The applicable VBW value is based on the VBW/RBW ratio displayed on

the lower half of the measurement screen.

SPAN/RBW: Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.

When the frequency span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is changed

to meet the selected ratio.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

RBW VBW/RBW VBW

30kHz 1:1 30kHz

1:0.3 10kHz

1:0.1 3kHz

1:0.03 1kHz

1:0.01 300Hz

1:0.003 100Hz

CH

3

3-14

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MARKER

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER TABLE:

Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the

bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y

coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the

selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

CH

3

3-15 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Marker (Cont’d)

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

MARKER :

MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop

frequency of the spectrum.

Each time the peak search key is pressed a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

The Measure key selects the following measurements in Spectrum mode.

Channel Power

Occupied Bandwidth

SEM (Spectrum Emission Mask)

ACP (Adjacent Channel Power)

AM/FM

CH

3

3-16

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MEASURE SETUP

When “Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, ACP and AM/FM

mode” is selected, then Measure Setup provides the following

measurement parameters:

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

INTEGRATION BW: Sets the channel power measurement

bandwidth.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

OCC BW % PWR: Sets the measurement bandwidth in

percentage.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

SEM MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

ACP MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by

JDViewer, PC Application Software.

CH

3

3-17 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Measure Setup (Cont’d)

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the

channel power.

AM/FM:

DEMOD: Turns AM/FM Demodulator On/Off.

DEMOD AT: AM/FM Demodulator uses Marker position to

demodulate. There are 6 markers are available in different

frequencies and user can select the frequency to be

demodulated among M1 to M6.

DEMOD MODE: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be demodulated.

DWELL TIME: Sets interval of AM/FM demodulator. AM/FM

Demodulator demodulates for a period of time set by Dwell Time.

VOLUME: Used to adjust volume.

AUTO GAIN: Used to adjust internal gain of demodulator.

CH

3

3-18

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division, etc: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑦ Trace Information

C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold

⑧ Information on Marker Tables.

⑨ Information on Active Marker

⑩ Frequency selection key

⑪ Channel Standard selection button.

⑫ Unit selection key, choose either Frequency or Channel

Figure 1 – Overview of Spectrum Analyzer Display

CH

3

3-19SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Direct Connection

Indirect Connection

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If

the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,

use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you

directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the

coupling port of a directional coupler.

Direct Connection

Indirect Connection

Figure 2 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection

Figure 3 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection

!

CH

3

3-20

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SPECTRUM ANALYZER INPUT MODE

The input circuit of the Spectrum Analyzer consists of an attenuator and an

amplifier. The function of the input circuit is to control the power level of

the input signal. If the input signal level is too high, the input circuit is

saturated resulting in a distorted signal. On the other hand, if the input

signal is too low, the S/N ratio becomes worse and makes it difficult to

perform an accurate measurement.

The default settings of the Spectrum measurement are the following:

Ref Level: 0dBm

Atten Mode: Auto

Attenuation: 20dB

RBW: 30kHz

VBW: 30kHz

Scale/Div: 10dB

Average: Off

CH

3

3-21 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

SELECT CHANNEL STANDARD

Once a channel standard is selected, user can analyze the specific

channel by simply entering the channel number even without knowing the

particular center frequency of the carriers. By selecting the unit in

Freq/Chan to Chan, the center frequency setting method will be changed

to Channel number. The Channel standard is applicable to the following

settings:

Spectrum Analyzer

Channel Scanner

Interference Analyzer

Tx Analyzer

Power Meter

The channel standard in the instrument supports various signal standards.

(The APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD shows a table of

the signal standards available in the instrument).

Press the Freq/Chan key to display the Frequency menu

Press the Channel Standard soft key and use the Up/down Keys or

Knob to select the desired channel standard. (Whenever the channel

standard would be changed, the lowest channel number for the

standard is automatically assigned in the channel.)

CH

3

3-22

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Select Channel Standard

User can recall the setting of each standard channel band from pre-

defined list of the instrument. When you change the display unit to "Chan",

and then select "Channel standard" from the list, the center frequency of

the display screen will be mapped according to the selected channel

standard (you will see channel number on the top of the screen menu).

The selected channel number will become the center frequency of the

band selected.

Table 6 – Select Channel Standard

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Unit]

<Freq/Chan>

[Channel Std.]

<Browse and select Frequency Band>

[Select]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Select from front hard key

Change the unit to “Chan”

Select std. from the list

Using Knob and Up/Down arrow

key

Select from screen menu

CH

3

3-23 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT

Table 7 – Spectrum Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss

was measured

Mode

[Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan

[Start Freq]

[Stop Freq]

[Center Freq]

or

[Center Freq]

[Span]

or

[Unit]

<Freq/Chan>

[Channel Standard]

<Select>

Set Frequency

Select Chan

Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down

Arrow key

Amplitude

[Reference Level]

[Scale Division]

[Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale

To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look

for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker

[Marker Select]

[Marker View]

[Marker Type]

[Marker Table]

[Marker Edit]

[Marker ]

<Marker CF>

<Marker Start>

<Marker Stop>

Set Marker

Select M1 ~ M6

On/Off

Normal/Delta

When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative

coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table

Type frequency to set Marker

Set current Marker frequency to center frequency

Set current Marker frequency to start frequency

Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG

[RBW]

[VBW/RBW]

[SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average

Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

3

3-24

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display

Table 8 – Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display

Step Description

Amplitude

[Attenuator]

<Manual/Auto>

<Manual>

Data Entry Key/Knob

Auto Atten Mode is default at Analysis

Set Atten Mode as Manual to change the

attenuation value

If Manual is selected

Type attenuation value, attenuation

setting range: 0 ~ 55dB, 5dB Step

BW/AVG

[Average]

Data Entry Key

[Enter]

Enter number of averaging to set

When Averaging reaches the set number,

a new measurement value replaces the

earliest measurement value in sequence

Average: 1~99

Trace/Display

[Trace Select]

[Max Hold]/[Min Hold]

[Trace Capture]

[Trace View On] or [Trace View Off]

[Trace Clear]

<Clear Current> or <Clear All>

Default status is all trace off

Select Active Trace from T1 ~ T6

Assign attributes of the Trace

Stop updating the trace and captures

current trace to memory

View or hide Active Trace on the screen

Clear Active Trace or all Traces

permanently

CH

3

3-25SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Spectrum

Measurement

Screen

Figure 4 – Example of Spectrum Measurement Screen

CH

3

3-26

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Measurement Procedure

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Channel Power measures the integrated power in a specific frequency

span displayed on the spectrum window. As the frequency band can be

configured, it is useful to measure channel power or total power. The

following are the limitations of band power measurement.

Maximum available span to set: 60MHz

RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Band power measurement is made by calculating the power within the

specified band span and integrating the data point displayed on the screen.

Selecting the span larger than 15MHz may cause a measurement error. It

is recommended to use the RF power meter function to measure total

power accurately.

Measurement Procedure

Table 9 – Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Center Freq]

Input center freq

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Set Frequency

Using Data Entry Key

Freq/Chan

[Span]

Input span

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Set Span

Using Data Entry Key

Measure

[Channel Power]

Measure Setup

[Mask Name]

[Integration BW]

[Limit]

Select Channel Power Measurement

Set internal parameters

Recalls Mask file

Set Bandwidth to be measured

Enable or Disable Limit

CH

3

3-27SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Channel Power

Measurement

Screen

The following figure shows the measurement result of a Channel Power

for cdmaOne/cdma2000 Single FA; where the channel power span is set

to 1.23MHz (on the lower right corner of the screen).

Figure 5 – Example of Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

3

3-28

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Measurement Procedure

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT Measurement Procedure

Occupied bandwidth measures the percentage of the transmitted power

within a specified bandwidth. This percentage is typically 99%.

Maximum available span to set: 15MHz

RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Table 10 – Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Center Freq]

Input center freq

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Set Frequency

Using Data Entry Key

Freq/Chan

[Span]

Input span

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Set Span

Using Data Entry Key

Measure

[Occupied BW]

Measure Setup

[Mask Name]

[OCC BW % PWR]

[Limit]

Select Occupied Bandwidth

Measurement

Set internal parameters

Recalls Mask file

Set % of Power within Bandwidth to be

measured

Enable or Disable Limit

CH

3

3-29 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

Figure 6 – Example of Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

3

3-30

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Measurement Procedure

SEM MEASUREMENT Measurement Procedure

Spurious Emission has the commonality with ACPR measurement that it

measures the interference of adjacent channels. It measures the power

ratio between in-band and adjacent channels.

Maximum available span to set: 15MHz

RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Table 11 – SEM Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Center Freq]

Input center freq

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Set Frequency

Using Data Entry Key

Freq/Chan

[Span]

Input span

GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Set Span

Using Data Entry Key

Measure

[SEM]

Measure Setup

[Mask Name]

[Limit]

Select SEM Measurement

Set internal parameters

Recalls Mask file

Enable or Disable Limit

CH

3

3-31 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

SEM Measurement Screen

Figure 7 – Example of SEM Measurement Screen

CH

3

3-32

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Measurement Procedure

ACP MEASUREMENT Measurement Procedure

Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is the power contained in a

specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the total carrier power. It

may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the

carrier and the specified offset frequency band. This is also called

Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR).

Maximum available span to set: 15MHz

RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Table 12 – ACP Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Center Freq]

Input center freq

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Set Frequency

Using Data Entry Key

Freq/Chan

[Span]

Input span

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Set Span

Using Data Entry Key

Measure

[ACP]

Measure Setup

[Mask Name]

[Limit]

Select ACP Measurement

Set internal parameters

Recalls Mask file

Enable or Disable Limit

CH

3

3-33 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Chapter 3

ACP Measurement Screen

Figure 8 – Example of ACP Measurement Screen

CH

3

3-34

Chapter 3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Measurement Procedure

AM/FM MEASUREMENT Measurement Procedure

The AM/FM demodulator operates using the power received from radio

waves and is designed for providing alternative way to identify interfering

signals.

Table 13 – AM/FM Measurement Procedure

Step Description

Mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan

[Center Freq]

Input center freq

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Set Frequency

Using Data Entry Key

Freq/Chan

[Span]

Input span

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Set Span

Using Data Entry Key

Measure

[AM/FM]

Marker

[Marker Select]

[Marker View]

[Demod Mode]

[Dwell Time]

[Demod At]

[Volume]

[Demod]

<On>/<Off>

Select AM/FM Measurement

Place Marker where frequency to be

demodulated

Select M1 ~ M6

On/Off

Select modulation type, AM, FM, CW

Set interval

Select Marker where demodulate (M1 ~ M6)

Set Volume

Enable or Disable

CH

4

4-1 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

4.0 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

In this chapter

Interference Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................................ 4-2

Spectrogram ......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) ........................................................................................... 4-3

How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 4-4 ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 4-4 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................. 4-5 Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 4-7 BW/AVG................................................................................................................................................ 4-7 Marker .................................................................................................................................................. 4-8 Peak Search ......................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Measure ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 4-10

Cable Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 4-12 Making Measurements ............................................................................................................................... 4-13

Spectrogram ....................................................................................................................................... 4-14 RSSI ................................................................................................................................................... 4-15

CH

4

4-2 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

INTERFERENCE ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

Interference is becoming more prevalent in the wireless community with

the increasing number of transmitters coming on the air. Wireless service

providers have traditionally used spectrum analyzers to monitor service

channels, frequencies, adjacent spectrum, and to locate sources of

interference. Unfortunately, a spectrum analyzer can only show the

interfering signal to the user, who must then determine the source of the

interference. To solve interference problems, the user must understand the

RF environment, know which transmitters are operating nearby, and

identify any new or unlicensed emitters.

The complete hardware and software solution of the JD7105A is more

efficient and economical than most bench-top spectrum analyzers alone.

The JD7105A is a hand-held system, highly functional, and requires no

software development.

Users can record and view multiple frequency bands on a single JD7105A

to quickly resolve interference issues in a few steps. The system also

performs unattended data logging for hours, days, or even weeks for later

analysis, further reducing time spent in the field. Users can also save time

and money by remotely monitoring test locations and changing test

scenarios over an Ethernet connection, eliminating the need to travel to

and from test locations.

With the logging capability, users can collect data and essentially perform

unattended spectrum monitoring, capturing and storing the spectral data

to perform other tasks instead of spending time watching a display. By

logging data, the operator can see not only the event of interest, but also

the spectral data before and after the event.

Using the JD7105A is an excellent hand-held solution for customers who

need a spectrum monitoring solution but do not want to spend the time

developing their own code.

CH

4

4-3 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

SPECTROGRAM

RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR (RSSI)

The Spectrogram mode is useful for tracking down the source of an

interfering signal. This measurement is done at user defined frequency

range. The power at a frequency (in dBm) is displayed along with a

spectrogram. This mode is especially useful when attempting to locate

an emitter using a directional antenna.

If you are using a directional antenna to receive the signal, you will see a

change in the amplitude of the tracked signal as you change the direction

of the antenna, and see a change in the Spectrogram color. The source of

the signal is located in the direction that results in the highest signal

strength.

A spectrogram is a three dimensional display.

The horizontal line or X-Axis of the spectrogram is frequency

The vertical line or Y-axis is time

And the color identification (spectrogram) indicates power level of the

tracked signal. As the signal strength increases, the color on the

spectrogram will change accordingly.

The RSSI - Received Signal Strength Indicator, is useful for observing

power levels of different frequencies over time.

CH

4

4-4 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

SOFT KEYS ESC FREQ/CHAN

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the key aspects of the instrument’s keys in the

interference analyzer mode.

Soft Keys

Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,

or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption

to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but

cannot be displayed, the “More” or “” key on the bottom corner will be

displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.

ESC

The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the

current setup.

Freq/Chan

Sets the frequency band with either standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,

the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is

completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in

predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured

selecting the CF Step Menu.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the

instrument will sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

CH

4

4-5 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

AMPLITUDE

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be

entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data

Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.

When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased

by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequency. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum

display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,

the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values

with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum Y-axis range when using the

spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Table 14 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE DIVISION: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it

represents the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default

value is 10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to

1dB per division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by

selecting the Scale Division key.

CH

4

4-6 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to

amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,

measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and

!

!

CH

4

4-7 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

TRACE/DISPLAY

BW/AVG

Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in

Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement

value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for

the Spectrum mode.

This key is not used in Interference Analyzer measurement mode.

RBW: Sets the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) of the Spectrum Analyzer.

RBW can be set from 10Hz to 300KHz in 1-3 sequence.

VBW/RBW: Sets proportional VBW based on the designated RBW. For

user’s better understanding of the rather complicated formula, he following

table shows the VBW setting in proportion to the VBW/RBW ratio at

30KHz RBW setting.

Table 15 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio

The applicable VBW value is based on the VBW/RBW ratio displayed on

the lower half of the measurement screen.

SPAN/RBW: Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.

When the frequency span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is changed

to meet the selected ratio.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

RBW VBW/RBW VBW

30kHz 1:1 30kHz

1:0.3 10kHz

1:0.1 3kHz

1:0.03 1kHz

1:0.01 300Hz

1:0.003 100Hz

CH

4

4-8 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

MARKER

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER TABLE:

Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the

bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y

coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the

selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

CH

4

4-9 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

Marker (Cont’d)

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

MARKER :

MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start

frequency of the spectrum.

MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop

frequency of the spectrum.

Each time the peak search key is pressed a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

The Measure key selects “Spectrogram & RSSI” modes.

When “Interference Analyzer” is selected, then Measure Setup provides

the following measurement parameters:

SPECTROGRAM MEASUREMENTS:

Restart: Restarts the measurement.

CH

4

4-10 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

Time Interval: Sets the time interval.

Auto Save: Saves the measurement data automatically to external

memory, USB.

Time Cursor: Sets the time cursor indicator (1~400).

RSSI MEASUREMENTS:

Restart: Restarts the measurement.

Alarm: Sets an alarm for up to 6 different frequencies.

Set Mask Value: Sets the mask value.

Auto Save: Saves the measurement data automatically to external

memory, USB.

① Reference Level, Scale Division of the Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ Color identification (spectrogram) indicates power level of the

tracked signal

⑦ Restart measurement, by pressing Restart screen button, the

previous measurement will be disappear and restarted.

⑧ Set Time Interval, sets the interval of the measurement

Figure 9 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (Spectrogram)

CH

4

4-11INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

⑨ Auto Save, saves the measurement data into data file

⑩ Set Time Cursor Indication, there are 400 measurement traces in a

single screen, user can check the previous measurement history by

setting Time Cursor

① Reference Level, Scale Division of the Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

④ Span Setting Information

⑤ Alarm Mask Level Setting Information

⑥ Alarm Count Information, shows the number of alarms exceeded

user mask

⑦ Restart measurement, by pressing Restart screen button, the

previous measurement will be disappear and restarted.

⑧ Set Alarm (Marker1 ~ Marker6), user can set alarms individually up

to 6 different markers

⑨ Set Mask Level, sets the level of alarm mask

⑩ Auto Save, saves the measurement data into data file

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Figure 10 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (RSSI)

CH

4

4-12 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

Connection

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If

the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,

use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you

directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the

coupling port of a directional coupler.

Figure 11 – Connection for Interference Analyzer

!

CH

4

4-13 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

MAKING MEASUREMENTS

The key measurement parameters of an interference analyzer are:

Spectrogram

RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator)

Once it has been identified a potential interfering signal using the

Spectrum Analyzer, you can use the interference analyzer function further

monitor the signal.

The typical steps to locate interference signals using the JD7105A Base

Station Analyzer are as follows:

1. Select Interference Analyzer mode.

2. Look at the spectrum on the bottom of the spectrogram display to

locate the suspected interfering signal.

3. Set a marker on the trace at the frequency of the interfering signal.

Try to use different markers at the different frequencies (you can

use up to 6 markers on 6 different frequencies).

4. Look at the assignments for these frequencies readout at the

bottom of the spectrum display.

5. Set time interval, which the spectrogram will be saved.

6. Select the RSSI mode to track in more detail the signals identified

with the markers (6 different frequency components are available

in one display). This will provide the power components on

those set frequencies over time.

The typical operating procedure to identify interference signal is as

follows:

CH

4

4-14 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

SPECTROGRAM

Table 16 – Interference Analysis in Spectrogram View

Step Description

Connect Antenna Connect antenna to RF In port

Mode

[Interference Analyzer]

[Spectrogram]

Select Interference Analyzer mode

Select spectrogram view

Freq/Chan

[Start Freq]

[Stop Freq]

[Center Freq]

or

[Center Freq]

[Span]

or

Select [Channel Standard]

Set Frequency

Amplitude

[Reference Level]

[Scale Division]

[Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale

To optimize S/N, change Atten mode

to manual and look for optimization

value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker

[Marker Select]

[Marker View]

Set Marker to either carrier frequency

or the interfering signal(M1 ~ M6)

On/Off

Absolute or relative coordinates of all

Maker are displayed on spectrum

waveform screen

Measure Setup

[Time Interval]

Enter value

[Auto Save]

<On/Off>

Set the time interval

Set measurement interval

Set Auto save

CH

4

4-15 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

Chapter 4

RSSI

Table 17 – Interference Analysis in RSSI View

Step Description

Sets Marker(s) in Spectrogram mode where to

need further analysis, then

Measure

[RSSI]

Select RSSI mode

[Alarm Mask]

[M1] ~ [M6]

<On/Off>

Set Alarm Mask

[Set Mask Value]

Enter Value

Set Mask value for alarm

Enter Mask Value using Data Entry key

[Auto Save]

<On/Off>

Set Auto save

CH

5

5-1 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

5.0 CHANNEL SCANNER

In this chapter

Channel Scanner Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 5-3

Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 5-3 ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-3 Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 5-3 Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4 BW/AVG................................................................................................................................................ 5-4 Marker .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 Peak Search ......................................................................................................................................... 5-5 Measure ................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 Measure setup ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5 Display Overview (General Channel Scanner ) .................................................................................... 5-6 Display Overview (GSM Channel Scanner) .......................................................................................... 5-7

Cable Connection ......................................................................................................................................... 5-8 Making Measurements ................................................................................................................................. 5-9

General Channel Scanner .................................................................................................................. 5-10 GSM Channel scanner ....................................................................................................................... 5-10

CH

5

5-2 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

CHANNEL SCANNER INTRODUCTION

A Channel Scanner is a radio receiver that can automatically tune, or scan,

two or more discrete frequencies & multi-channels, indicating when it finds

a signal on one of them and then continuing scanning when that frequency

goes silent.

There are two different types of channel scanner functionalities in the

JD7105A, general channel scanner and GSM channel scanner. The

general channel scanner can measure up to 20 channels in GSM, CDMA

or WCDMA networks. Using existing format-based or custom parameters,

the user will be able to easily verify improper multi-channel power levels.

The GSM channel scanner has the function to display channel power and

related information up to 128 GSM down link signals. This channel

scanner can quickly identifies improper power levels that affect network

performance; this can be done either over the air or directly connected to

the cell site.

CH

5

5-3 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

SOFT KEYS ESC

FREQ/CHAN

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the key aspects of the instrument’s keys in the

General Channel Scanner mode.

Soft Keys

Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,

or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption

to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but

cannot be displayed, the “More” or “” key on the bottom corner will

display another screen menu.

ESC

The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the

current setup.

Freq/Chan

For General Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SCAN MODE: Changes the scan modes.

List: Calls up the list stored in the instrument.

Range: Sets frequency range to be scanned.

START: Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner. Values can

be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or the arrow keys. When

using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by selecting the soft key

with the corresponding value unit.

STEP SIZE: Sets frequency step incremental size.

INTEGRATED BANDWIDTH: Sets bandwidth to be measured.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

CS UNIT: Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

CH

5

5-4 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

TRACE/DISPLAY

BW/AVG

For GSM Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SCAN MODE: Changes the scan modes.

Range: Sets frequency range to be scanned.

START FREQ: Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner.

Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or the arrow keys.

When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by selecting the

soft key with the corresponding value unit.

NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Sets the number of channel to be scanned.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

This key is not used in General Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Channel Scanner Mode, a

Trace/Display key is used as below.

ZOOM START FREQ: Selects the start frequency of the zoomed screen.

For General Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and

"Hold".

For GSM Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and

"Hold".

CH

5

5-5 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

MARKER

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

This key is not used in General or GSM Channel Scanner modes.

This key is not used in General or GSM Channel Scanner modes.

This key is not used in Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Channel Scanner Mode, a Measure

key is used as below.

MEASURE ON/OFF: Turns the measurements on or off.

This key is not used in Genera or GSM Channel Scanner modes.

CH

5

5-6 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

(GENERAL

CHANNEL

SCANNER )

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ RF In Loss Setting Information

⑤ Set scan mode

⑥ Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner

⑦ Set frequency step increment size

⑧ Set bandwidth to be measured

⑨ Using this key, the channel band can be selected without setting

Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom channel

bands will pop-up to select the proper band

⑩ Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When the

“Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step

1

2

3

4

5

9

6

7

8

10

Figure 12 – Overview of General Channel Scanner Display

CH

5

5-7CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW (GSM

CHANNEL

SCANNER)

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Frequency Setting Information (Center/Start/Stop)

④ RF In Loss Setting Information

⑤ Set scan mode

⑥ Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner

⑦ Set the number of channels to be scanned

⑧ Using this key, the channel band can be selected without setting

Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom channel

bands will pop-up to select the proper band

⑨ Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When the

“Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step

Figure 13 – Overview of GSM Channel Scanner Display

CH

5

5-8 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

Direct Connection

Indirect Connection

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If

the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,

use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you

directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the

coupling port of a directional coupler.

Figure 14 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA or

LPA

! CAUTION

+30dBm MAXAVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Figure 15 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection

!

CH

5

5-9 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

MAKING MEASUREMENTS

The key measurement parameters of a channel scanner are:

General Channel Scanner

GSM Channel Scanner

The general channel scanner can measure up to 20 channels in GSM,

CDMA or WCDMA networks. Using existing format-based or custom

parameters, the user will be able to easily verify improper multi-channel

power levels.

The GSM channel scanner has the function to display channel power and

related information up to 128 GSM down link signals. This channel

scanner can quickly identifies improper power levels that affect network

performance; this can be done either over the air or directly connected to

the cell site.

CH

5

5-10 CHANNEL SCANNER

Chapter 5

GENERAL CHANNEL SCANNER

GSM CHANNEL SCANNER

Table 18 – General Channel Scanner

Before using GSM Channel Scanner, the instrument must be in GSM

Analyzer mode. The following procedure sets the GSM Channel Scanner

mode:

Table 19 – GSM Channel Scanner

Step Description

Mode

[Channel Scanner]

Select General Channel Scanner

mode

Freq/Chan

[Start]

Enter value

Set Frequency

[Step size]

Enter value

Set frequency step increment size

[Integ. BW]

Enter value

Set bandwidth to be measured

[CS Unit]

<Freq/Chan>

Set channel scanner unit to be

displayed

Step Description

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM/EDGE]

Move to GSM Analyzer mode

[Channel Scanner]

Freq/Chan

[Start Freq]

Enter Value

Select GSM Channel Scanner

Set start frequency

[Num of CHs]

Enter Value

Set number of channels to be

scanned

[Unit]

<Freq/Chan>

Change the unit

[Measure]

<On/Off>

Starts measurement

CH

6

6-1 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

6.0 CDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter

CDMA Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Concept of Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................ 6-3 Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concepts ............................................................................ 6-3 Code Domain Measurement Concepts ................................................................................................. 6-4 Spurious Emission Measurement Concepts ......................................................................................... 6-5 ACPR Measurement Concepts ............................................................................................................. 6-5

Using CDMA Analyzer .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 6-7

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 6-7 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................. 6-7 Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 6-9 BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................6-11 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 6-12 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 6-13 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 6-14 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 6-15 Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 6-16

Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 6-16 External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 6-17

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 6-18 Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................................... 6-19 Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-19

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 6-20 Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 6-20 Occupied Bandwidth Screen ....................................................................................................... 6-21

ACPR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 6-22 ACPR Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 6-23 ACPR Screen ............................................................................................................................. 6-24

Spurious Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ................................................................................... 6-25 SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6-25 SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 6-26

CDMA Code Domain Measurement.................................................................................................... 6-27 CDP Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 6-27 CDP Screen ................................................................................................................................ 6-28 cdma2000 CDP Measurement Items .......................................................................................... 6-29

CDMA OTA Measurement................................................................................................................... 6-30 OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 6-30 OTA Measurement Screen .......................................................................................................... 6-31

CH

6

6-2 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

cdma2000 is one of the proposals for the IMT-2000 requirements for a 3G

global wireless communications system. The 3GPP2 is implementing this

wideband CDMA system as a derivative of the IS-95-B CDMA system,

also known as cdmaOne. The 3GPP2 organizational partners are ARIB,

TTC, TIA, and TTA.1

CdmaOne uses dual BPSK (Binary Phase-Shifting Key) for the forward

link and OQPSK (Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) for the reverse

link.

cdma2000 uses QPSK (Quadrature phase-shift keying) modulation for the

forward link and QPSK modulation with HPSK spreading for the reverse

link. Both forward and reverse links may have several channels, and

individual characteristics for each channel. The chip rate depends on the

mode selected.

This section provides the basic concepts of CDMA (cdmaOne &

cdma2000) communication systems, and explains how the measurements

are performed by the instrument.

CH

6

6-3 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CONCEPT OF CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

MODULATION ACCURACY (RHO) MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless

industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined

frequency channel.

The Channel Power measurement reports the total transmitted power

within the channel bandwidth (1.23MHz for cdmaOne). The measurement

acquires a number of points representing the input signal in the time

domain. It transforms this information into the frequency domain using

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and then calculates the channel power. The

effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency domain trace is

proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

To improve repeatability, either the number of averages or the number of

data points can be increased with a longer time record. The channel

power trace is shown in the graph window, while the absolute channel

power in dBm and the mean power spectral density in dBm/Hz are shown

in the text window.

Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM (error

vector modulation) and CDP (code domain power).

Rho is the ratio between the correlated power in a single coded channel

and the total signal power. This is a simplified case of code domain power

since this measurement is made on a single coded channel.

This measurement takes into account all possible error factors in the

entire transmission chain including baseband filtering, I/Q modulation

anomalies, filter amplitude, phase variation, and power amplifier distortion.

This provides an overall indication of the transmitter's performance level.

CH

6

6-4 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CODE DOMAIN MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the 64

Walsh channels, relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz bandwidth

centered at the Center Frequency. Each Walsh channel level is displayed

as an individual vertical bar. Because this is a relative measurement, the

unit of measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of

signal levels between the Pilot, Sync, Paging, and Traffic channels.

Rho: Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM

and code domain power. Rho is the ratio between the correlated power in

a single coded channel and the total signal power. This is a simplified case

of code domain power since this measurement is made on a single coded

channel.

Time Offset: Time Offset indicates how well the transmitter’s signal is

time-aligned to the system time. The displayed value takes into account

the PN Sequence offset Index of the transmitter.

Frequency Error: Frequency Error is the frequency difference between

the transmitter’s actual center frequency and the frequency (or channel)

entered.

Pilot Power: It is the relative power of the pilot channel (Walsh code 0)

with respect to the carrier’s power.

Sync Power: It is the relative power of the sync channel (Walsh code 32)

with respect to the carrier’s power.

Paging Power: Is the relative power of the paging channel (Walsh code 1)

with respect to the carrier’s power.

Average Traffic Channel Power: It is the average relative power of the

active traffic channels with respect to the carrier power. Traffic channels

are defined as all of the Walsh codes except Walsh 0,1and 32. A traffic

channel is active if its coding power is greater than the active threshold

parameter selected.

CH

6

6-5 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

SPURIOUS EMISSION MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

ACPR MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

Measures the spurious emissions in the transmitter’s band relative to the

selected channel power. The transmitter’s band spectrum is measured in

several frequency segments using resolution bandwidths as specified by

the standard. The channel power (integrated power in a 1.23 MHz

bandwidth) is measured first, and then it is used as a reference for the

measurement limit levels. The spectrum, centered around the carrier as

well as above and below the carrier, is then measured. For each spectrum

segment, the measurement looks for the spectrum peak closest to the limit

and reports it as the Worst Spur.

Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), as it applies to cdmaOne, is the

power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the

total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral

density between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

As a composite measurement of out-of-channel emissions, ACPR

combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications to provide useful

figures-of-merit for spectral growth and emissions produced by

components and circuit blocks without the need to perform a full spectrum

emissions mask measurement.

This ACPR measurement analyzes the total power levels within the

defined carrier bandwidth and at given frequency offset on both sides of

the carrier frequency.

It uses an integration bandwidth method that performs a time domain data

acquisition and applies FFT to get a frequency domain trace. In this

measurement, the channel integration bandwidth is analyzed using the

automatically defined resolution bandwidth (RBW), which is much

narrower than the channel bandwidth. The measurement computes an

average power of the channel over a specified number of data acquisitions,

automatically compensating for resolution bandwidth and noise bandwidth.

CH

6

6-6 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

USING CDMA ANALYZER

This section provides a procedure for the transmission analysis function to

test the transmitter’s performance of CDMA (cdmaOne & cdma2000)

systems.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for CDMA system.

Channel Power

Occupied Bandwidth

Spurious Emission

ACPR

Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)

OTA

Auto Measure

CH

6

6-7 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides guidance on the use of the instrument’s keys in

CDMA Tx Analyzer mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,

the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is

completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in

predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured

selecting the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be

entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data

Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.

When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased

by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Amplitude

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACPR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum

display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,

the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values

with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

CH

6

6-8 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets Y-axis maximum range when using the

spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

Table 20 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

!

!

CH

6

6-9 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

TRACE/DISPLAY

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is

used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

REFERENCE: Selects the Relative or Absolute value to be displayed.

REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.

ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

CH

6

6-10 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

CH

6

6-11 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

BW/AVG

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Trace/Display key is

used as below.

WALSH CODE: Selects the Walsh Code to be displayed between 64 or

128.

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be

demodulated.

AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to

external memory, USB.

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an BW/AVG key is

used as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

CH

6

6-12 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

MARKER

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

CH

6

6-13 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as

below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to

select measurement menu listed below.

Channel Power Measurement Occupied Bandwidth Measurement SEM Measurement ACPR Measurement Demodulator Measurement OTA Measurement Auto Measure

CH

6

6-14 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

MEASURE SETUP

This key is not used when the instrument is in Channel Power,

Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, and ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key

is used as below.

THRESHOLD: Indicates which codes are considered active.

Q PAGING CHANNEL: Q paging channel indicates the power of Quick

Page Walsh code 80.

CH

6

6-15CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑦ Trace Information

C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold

⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key

⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key

⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key

⑪ SEM Measurement Key

⑫ ACPR Measurement Key

⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

Figure 16 – Overview of CDMA Tx Analyzer Display

CH

6

6-16 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

SETUP

Frequency Setup

Setup frequency information in advance is necessary to use the Tx

Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-FA can be done conveniently with The

JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-FA.

Table 21 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss was measured

Mode [Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan [Start Freq] [Stop Freq] [Center Freq]

or [Center Freq] [Span]

or [Unit] <Freq/Chan> [Channel Standard] <Select>

Set Frequency Select Chan Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow key

Amplitude [Reference Level] [Scale Division] [Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker [Marker Select] [Marker View] [Marker Type] [Marker Table] [Marker Edit] [Marker ] <Marker CF>

<Marker Start> <Marker Stop>

Set Marker Select M1 ~ M6 On/Off Normal/Delta When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table Type frequency to set Marker Set current Marker frequency to center frequency Set current Marker frequency to start frequency Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG [RBW] [VBW/RBW] [SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

6

6-17CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

External Clock

Setting

Standards

To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurement results, The

JD7105A and Base Station must be synchronized. When external clock is

not supplied, The JD7105A works with built-in internal High Accuracy Time

Base. However, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate value

if it is not synchronized with signal source. Therefore, it is highly

recommended to use the same reference clock as signal source. Sync

Mode can be changed in Setup.

Table 22 – External Clock Operating Standard

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref

Clock

Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In

(BNC)

Manual switching

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 17 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

CH

6

6-18 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Table 23 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

Channel Power measures the integrated strength of the wireless signal

within a defined bandwidth. It is the primary measurement item in the

CDMA system. Channel power measurement of cdmaOne channel is

made by integrating the spectral density within 1.23MHz integration

bandwidth using the spectrum data from FFT. Since the JD7105A utilizes

pre-defined data points and RBW to perform the measurement, some

parameters cannot be changed.

Port Name Signal Characteristics

Even Sec Sync In PP2S

10msec

TTL compatible

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

CH

6

6-19 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

Channel Power Procedure

Channel Power Screen

Table 24 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA]

[Channel Power]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select Channel Power Measurement

Figure 18 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-20 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure

Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is

defined as the bandwidth which includes 99% of the transmitted power

among total transmitted power.

Table 25 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA]

[Occupied Bandwidth]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

CH

6

6-21 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

Occupied Bandwidth Screen

The default span for cdma2000 occupied bandwidth measurement is set

at the factory to 3.23MHz. Users can change the span using the

Freq/Chan key.

Total Power: Total power contained in the specified span.

Occupied Power: 99% of the total power.

Occupied Freq: Frequency bandwidth containing 99% of the total

power.

Figure 19 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-22 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

ACPR MEASUREMENT

Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is defined as the ratio of the

average power in the adjacent frequency channel (or offset) to the

average power in the transmitted frequency channel. It may also be

expressed as the ratio of the integrated signal power in the adjacent

channel to the integrated signal power in the main channel, which is

defined as ACLR (Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio).

To maintain a quality call by avoiding channel interference, it is important

to measure and reduce any adjacent channel leakage power transmitted

from a mobile phone. The following is a list of factors that degrade the

ACPR characteristics.

Fault occurs in the control of the DC power supplied to power

amplifier (PA), RF power control of PA, or I,Q control in the Base

Station.

Fault in PA gain control caused by increased distortion.

Increased harmonics due to the degradation of PA’s linearity.

The increase in induced power to adjacent channel caused by degraded

ACPR characteristics increases the noise in the in-band of the adjacent

channel, which results in a call quality degradation.

In-band noise in CDMA system not only degrades communication quality,

but also becomes a major factor of reduction of call capacity.

CH

6

6-23 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

ACPR Procedure

Table 26 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA or

LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA]

[ACPR]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select ACPR Measurement

CH

6

6-24 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

ACPR Screen

Total Power: Channel power measurement value

Offset Frequency (3GPP recommendation):

For Cellular bands: 750KHz, 1.98MHz, 3.125MHz

For PCS bands: 885KHz, 1.98MHz, 3.125MHz

Integ BW: Frequency band to measure power around the center of

offset frequency

Lower: Power value at the point of frequency offset lower than the

center frequency

dBc: Channel Power – Power contained in the integrated

bandwidth of the offset point (relative)

dBm: Channel Power – Power contained in integrated

bandwidth of the offset point (absolute)

Upper: Power value at the point of frequency offset, higher than the

center frequency

dBc: Channel Power – Power contained in the integrated

bandwidth of the offset point (relative)

dBm: Channel Power – Power contained in integrated

bandwidth of the offset point (absolute)

Figure 20 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-25 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

SPURIOUS EMISSION MASK (SEM) MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure

Spurious Emission has the commonality with ACPR measurement that it

measures the interference of adjacent channels. It measures the power

ratio between in-band and adjacent channels. Emission Measurement

differs from ACPR measurement in that it sets the mask on entire TX band

at the carrier center frequency and measures if the power within a defined

BW of adjacent channel exceeds the masked limit with Channel Power at

1.23MHz as the reference.

Table 27 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA]

[SEM]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select SEM Measurement

CH

6

6-26 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

SEM Screen

Total Power: Channel power measurement value.

Lower Peak: The absolute value of the highest peak at the band of

frequency offset lower than the center frequency.

Upper Peak: The absolute value of the highest peak at the band of

frequency offset higher than the center frequency.

Marker’s position is defined by the Total Power Reference

measured. If peak values exceed the mask during the

measurement, then a “FAIL” message will be displayed on the upper

screen.

Figure 21 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-27 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CDMA CODE DOMAIN MEASUREMENT

CDP Measurement Procedure

The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the 64

Walsh channels relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz bandwidth

centered at the Center Frequency. Each Walsh channel level is displayed

as an individual vertical bar. Because this is a relative measurement, the

unit of measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of

signal levels between the Pilot, Sync, Paging, and Traffic channels.

Table 28 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA or

LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[CDMA]

[Demodulator]

Measure Setup

[PN Offset]

Auto/Manual

[PN Inc]

[Threshold]

Auto/Manual

[Limit]

On/Off

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select Demodulator Measurement

Set Internal Parameters

CH

6

6-28 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CDP Procedure (cont’d)

CDP Screen

Active channel threshold level is an advanced setting that can be set

to indicate which coded channels are considered active. The default

setting is -27dB.

On the CDP measurement screen, information on the CH# among the

configured CH’s is displayed on the measurement screen. CH# can

be changed with the arrow keys. If there is an empty CH in between,

no CDP measurement result is shown and the message CDP

measurement is under progress will be shown, in this case, press an

arrow key once to stop the CDP measurement for empty CH and

moves to the next (or prior) CH.

Input of the code channel number using numeric keys after

selecting Marker-Marker Channel moves the marker to the

corresponding channel. The code channel number, relative value

(dB) and absolute value (dBm) of the marker’s position are displayed on

the upper right corner of the display.

In the above screen, green is for “Pilot”, red for “Paging” and blue for

“Sync” channels.

Figure 22 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-29 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

cdma2000 CDP Measurement Items

Ec/Io

Pilot Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)

Sync Walsh Channel Power

Sync Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)

Paging Walsh Channel Power

Paging Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)

Traffic Walsh Channel Level

Traffic Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power(dBm)

Frequency Error

Frequency difference between the center frequency of the

transmitter’s (BTS) and the frequency entered

Time offset

Time Offset compares the PN offset timing with the overall system

time. This measurement checks the start of PN offset in comparison

to either the GPS signal or the Even Second clock signal

Waveform Quality (Rho)

Rho = Correlated Power / Channel Power

Rho measures the modulation quality for a CDMA transmitter along

with EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It includes all errors occurred

along the transmitter chain such as base band filtering, abnormality of

I/Q modulator and distortion in power amplifier. A perfect Rho value is

1.0 indicating that all of the power is being transmitted correctly

Max Active

The highest value of active channel among Walsh code channels

except W64, W164, and W3264

Active Set: Threshold Level to discriminate Active Channel and

Inactive Channel (Factory Set: -27dB)

Average Active

∑ Traffic Channel Power / # of Traffic Channels

Max Inactive

Highest level among Inactive channels

Active Set: Threshold Level to discriminate Active Channel and

Inactive Channel (Factory Set: -27dB)

Average Inactive

∑ Uncorrelated Walsh Channel Power/ # of Inactive Channels

Pilot Power (dBm)

Incoming RF Channel Power + Ec/Io

CH

6

6-30 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

CDMA OTA MEASUREMENT

OTA Measurement Procedure

The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for

a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is

especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or

physical connection is not available.

The following is the measurement procedure of over the air measurement.

Note that the instrument must have access to the reference frequency

from the GPS receiver to get more accurate measurement results.

Table 29 – CDMA OTA Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to the JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to the JD7105AGPS port.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

BTS

Modulated signal (CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna (Omni or Directional)

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

GPS Antenna

Mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[CDMA]

[OTA]

Measure Setup

Threshold

Auto/Manual

Quick Page

On/Off

Limits

On/Off

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select CDMA

Select OTA Measurement

Set Internal Measurement Parameters

CH

6

6-31 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

OTA Measurement Screen

PN Scanner

Each access network sector has a unique PN offset. You can use

the PN Scanner to identify all active PNs in the area.

Multi-path Profile

Multipath profile indicates the amount of power of the dominant pilot

signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to

multipath echoes (expressed in dB). Ideally, this value should be

very small. Multipath profile is the result of portions of the original

broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna out of phase. This

can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects, such as

buildings, or being refracted through the atmosphere differently from

the main signal.

Note that the Multipath Profile is only valid for Over the Air

measurements. It does not apply to Transmitter measurements.

Code Domain

Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active

channels and are indicated as such on the display. Once the

channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power in each

channel relative to the total signal power.

Figure 23 – CDMA OTA Measurement Screen

CH

6

6-32 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating

at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the

transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System

imperfections, such as amplifier non-linearity, will present themselves

as an undesired distribution of power in the code domain.

Channel Power (dBm)

The channel power measurement measures the channel power within

a specified bandwidth (default of 1.23 MHz).

Pilot Power (dBm)

Incoming RF Channel Power + Ec/Io.

Ec/Io = Pilot Channel Power/Channel Power

Waveform Quality (rho)

Measure the correlated power to total power. The rho limit for CDMA

base stations as specified in the TIA IS-97 document is 0.912,

indicating that 91.2% of the correlated pilot power is contained in the

total transmission power.

Note that waveform quality, rho might be less than 0.912 when over

the air measurement due to an air-interface.

PN Offset

It is a “short code” sequence that provides a unique identifier for each

sector of each cell site. The PN Offsets are applied to the I and Q

signals before modulation. PN Offsets are offset in time by 52.08μs

and they repeat every 26.666ms. This yields 512 unique short code

sequences (0-511). The access terminal needs the PN Offset to

decode information in the Pilot and MAC channels, which are

transmitted by the access network.

Frequency Offset

To ensure that each CDMA transmitter is on its frequency and not

interfering with other CDMA channels, the standards specify very tight

frequency error performance, known as frequency tolerance. In the

PCS bands, the specification is ±0.05 parts per million, which

translates to only ±99Hz at a carrier frequency of 1980 MHz. In the

cellular bands, a CDMA transmitter must be within about 40Hz of

CH

6

6-33 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 6

absolute frequency (±0.05 ppm at a carrier frequency of 800 MHz).

To accurately measure the frequency, the test equipment must have

access to the reference frequency from the GPS receiver.

Time Offset

Each sector of each base station site operates on the same frequency

channel, and is distinguished from the others by a “PN offset”

sequence in the CDMA system. The PN offsets are offset in time by

52.08μs (64 chips) each and they repeat every 26.666ms (32768

chips). This yields 512 PN codes (32768/64), where each has a

unique offset.

The time offset measurement compares the time of the repeat to the

offset from the even-second clock (base station, or GPS time). The

CDMA standards specify a maximum offset of 10 microseconds, but 3

microseconds is a recommended maximum. If the time offset of the

target cell is too far from that of the current site, the handoff will not

happen.

This is the only transmitter test that requires the even-second clock

signal from the base station. Other transmitter tests can be

performed without this connection.

CH

7

7-1

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

7.0 EVDO TX ANALYZER

In this chapter

EVDO Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 7-2

1xEV-DO Forward Link ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Frame Structure .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Channel Power Measurement Concepts .............................................................................................. 7-4 Code Domain (Forward Link) Measurement Concepts ......................................................................... 7-4 Modulation Accuracy (Waveform Quality) Measurement Concepts ...................................................... 7-5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concepts ...................................................................................... 7-6 Spurious Emissions and Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Concepts ........................................ 7-6

Using EVDO Analyzer .................................................................................................................................. 7-8 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 7-9

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 7-9 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................. 7-9 Trace/Display .......................................................................................................................................7-11 BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 7-13 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 7-15 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 7-16 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 7-17 Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 7-18

Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 7-18 External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 7-19 Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification .......................................................................................... 7-20

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 7-20 Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................................... 7-21 Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 7-21

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 7-22 Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 7-22 Occupied Bandwidth Screen ....................................................................................................... 7-23

Spurious Emission Mask Measurement .............................................................................................. 7-24 SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7-24 SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 7-24

ACPR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 7-25 ACPR Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 7-25 ACPR Screen ............................................................................................................................. 7-25

Code Domain Power ........................................................................................................................... 7-26 EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-26 EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement .......................................................................................... 7-26 EV-DO Traffic Channel Measurement ......................................................................................... 7-26 CDP Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 7-27 EV-DO Pilot Channel CDP .......................................................................................................... 7-28 EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement Parameters ........................................................................ 7-29 EV-DO MAC Channel CDP ......................................................................................................... 7-29 EV-DO MAC Channel CDP Screen ............................................................................................ 7-30 EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters ....................................................................... 7-30 Required Specification for EV-DO MAC Channel........................................................................ 7-31 EV-DO Data Channel Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-31 EV-DO Data Channel Measurement Screen............................................................................... 7-32 EV-DO Traffic CDP Measurement Parameters ........................................................................... 7-32 Required Specification for EV-DO Traffic Channel ...................................................................... 7-33

CH

7

7-2 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

EVDO ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

1xEV-DO is the name applied to the first single-channel evolution (1xEV)

of 3GPP2 communications system optimized for data only (-DO). As 1xEV-

DO has evolved from cdma2000 (voice) systems and has structural

similarity with cdma2000, this section will describe the differences

between 1xEV-DO and cdma2000.

1xEV-DO uses what it is known as High Rate Packet Data, using the

same final spread rate of 1.2288 Mcps as does cdma2000 SR1. It also

uses the same digital filter to reduce the final modulation bandwidth; as a

result, 1xEV-DO is spectrally compatible with cdma2000 SR1. Both 1xEV-

DO and cdma2000 SR1 can utilize the same amplifiers, combiners, and

antennas, which reduces the implementation cost of 1xEV-DO.

Although 1xEV-DO is compatible with much of the existing infrastructure of

cdma2000, the two systems cannot occupy the same channel

simultaneously. Each 1xEV-DO channel requires a paired 1.25 MHz clear

channel; therefore it cannot be overlaid with cdma2000 channels.

1xEV-DO requires a dedicated CDMA channel (1.25 MHz) for the packet-

data system. This channel cannot carry any voice. The system uses the

exact chip rate and emission filters that are used in cdma2000 and IS-95

CDMA systems, so the new system is spectrally identical to legacy

systems.

CH

7

7-3EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

1XEV-DO

FORWARD LINK

FRAME

STRUCTURE

1xEV-DO relies on GPS for intercell synchronization, in the same manner

as cdma2000. The 1xEV-DO system is well suited for data transmission in

the forward link as it is optimized for high speed packet data

communication. When compared to the recent IS95-B design in

cdma2000, 1xEV-DO shows a 6 times improvement in the overall network

data rate. The largest contribution to overall increased data throughput is

the ability of 1xEV-DO to negotiate for increased data rate for individual

users or mobiles as only one user is served at a time. The forward link is

always transmitted in its full power using a rate control scheme instead of

power control scheme, as in cdma2000.

Forward link of 1xEV-DO is a frame structure and each frame consists of

16 slots. The frame period for 1xEV-DO is 26.667ms, which is also the

period of one pilot channel. Each frame is divided into 16 slots of 1.666ms.

1xEV-DO uses CDMA modulation scheme, but unlike its previous systems

the Pilot, MAC (Media Access Control), and Data (Traffic) Channel are not

transmitted simultaneously; instead they are transmitted in TDM (Time

Division Multiplex). The following figure shows the frame structure of EV-

DO and TDM structure of each channel at one time slot. The slot with the

loaded data in traffic channel is called Active Slot and the slot with no data

in traffic channel is called Idle Slot.

Slot0

Slot7

Slot 15

MAC64

chips

Pilot96 chips

MAC64

chips

Data400 chips

Frame

Active Slot

MAC64

chips

Pilot96 chips

MAC64

chips

Data400 chips

MAC64

chips

Pilot96 chips

MAC64

chips

MAC64

chips

Pilot96 chips

MAC64

chips

Preamble: 64 to 1024 chips

1024 chips = half slot 1024 chips = half slot

Idle Slot

1.666ms

Slot

Figure 24 – 1xEv-DO Forward Link Structure

CH

7

7-4 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

CODE DOMAIN (FORWARD LINK) MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless

industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined

frequency channel. This procedure measures the total power within the

defined channel for 1xEV-DO. This measurement is applied the design,

characterization, evaluation, and verification of transmitters and their

components, or devices, for base stations and mobile stations.

For 1xEV-DO, depending on the installed measurement personality

revision and measurement selection, the test device is fixed to a base

station.

The Channel Power measurement reports the total transmitted power

within the channel bandwidth, 1.23 MHz for the 1xEV-DO mode. The

measurement acquires a number of points representing the input signal in

the time domain. It transforms this information into the frequency domain

using FFT and then calculates the channel power.

Since the code domain measurements de-spread and descramble the

1xEV-DO signal into its physical channels, the number of active channels

of various symbol rates (which are denoted by widths) can be observed.

The width of the channel is inversely proportional to the Walsh code length

in number of bits. In the code domain, there is a fixed amount of code

space for a given chip rate. Therefore, by using the different Walsh codes,

the system can dynamically allocate the code spaces for high speed data

users.

This code domain power composite view provides information about the

in-channel characteristics of the 1xEV-DO signal. It directly informs the

user of the active channels with their individual channel powers. The

composite view also shows which data rates are active and the

corresponding amount of code space used. The following are conditions

under which a general unlock can occur: the Pilot signal is too low in

power or no Pilot signal is available, the frequency error is too large, or a

frequency inversion is present.

CH

7

7-5

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

MODULATION ACCURACY (WAVEFORM QUALITY) MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

When the level of the code domain noise floor is too high, relative to a

reference or an expected level, one of the possible causes might be due

to CW interference, like local oscillator feed through or spurs. I/Q

modulation impairments can be another source of this uncorrelated noise.

The I/Q demodulation measurements can reveal errors such as I/Q gain

imbalance or I/Q Quadrature error.

This procedure measures the power levels of the spread channels in

composite RF channels.

The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the spread

channels, relative to the total power within the 1.230 MHz channel

bandwidth centered at the center frequency. Each spread channel level is

displayed as an individual vertical bar with a different width determined by

a spread rate. Because this is a relative measurement, the unit of

measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of signal

levels between the Pilot, MAC, and Traffic channels.

Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM and

code domain power. Rho is the ratio of the correlated power in a single

coded channel to the total signal power. This is a simplified case of code

domain power since this measurement is made on a single coded channel.

This measurement takes into account all possible error mechanisms in the

entire transmission chain including baseband filtering, I/Q modulation

anomalies, filter amplitude, phase nonlinearities, and power amplifier

distortion. This provides an overall indication of the performance level of

the transmitter.

In a digitally modulated signal, it is possible to predict what the ideal

magnitude and phase of the carrier should be at any time, based on the

transmitted data sequence. The transmitter’s modulated signal is

compared to an ideal signal vector. The difference between these two

vectors is sampled and processed using DSP. Rho values are in the range

of 0.000 to 1.000. A value of 1.000 indicates perfect correlation to the

reference (high modulation quality).

CH

7

7-6 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

SPURIOUS EMISSIONS AND ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS

Occupied bandwidth measurements express the percentage of the

transmitted power within a specified bandwidth. This percentage is

typically 99%.

The spectrum shape of a 1xEV-DO signal can give useful qualitative

insight into transmitter operation. Any distortion to the spectrum shape can

indicate problems of the transmitter’s performance.

The instrument uses digital signal processing (DSP) to sample the input

signal and convert it to the frequency domain. With the instrument tuned to

a fixed center frequency, samples are digitized at a high rate with DSP

hardware, and then converted to the frequency domain with FFT software.

The total power within the measured frequency span is integrated for its

100% of power. The frequencies of 0.5% of the total power are then

calculated to get 99.0% bandwidth.

Spurious Emissions Mask (SEM) & Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)

measurements include the in-band and out-of-band adjacent channel

power and spurious emissions. ACP, as it applies to 1xEV-DO, is the

power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the

carrier frequency. It may also be expressed as power spectral density

between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

As a composite measurement of out-of-channel emissions, Spurious

Emissions and ACP combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications

to provide useful values of figure-of-merit for spectral re-growth as well as

spurious emissions produced by nonlinear components and circuit blocks.

To maintain a quality data transmission and avoid adjacent channel

interference, it is necessary to measure and reduce the adjacent channel

power transmitted by an access network. The characteristics of adjacent

channel power are mainly determined by the transmitter design, in

particular the power amplifiers and the low-pass filters.

Adjacent channel power is defined by 1xEV-DO standard as the total

power within the bandwidth of ±15 kHz, with the filters edge at 750 kHz

offset from the carrier frequency.

CH

7

7-7

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

Spurious Emissions and Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Concepts (cont’d)

This ACP measurement analyzes the total power levels within the defined

carrier bandwidth at given frequency offsets on both sides of the carrier's

frequency. Also, the SEM measures spurious signal levels in given offsets

or region frequencies and relates them to the carrier power. These

measurements require the user to specify measurement bandwidths of the

carrier channel and each of the offset frequency pairs up to 5. Each pair

may be defined with unique measurement bandwidth.

A reference channel integration bandwidth method is used to measure the

carrier channel power, and offset or region power. When “ACP” is selected,

the adjacent channel power measurement is made with the optimized

region and limits settings. When “SEM” is selected, the conducted

spurious emissions measurements are made with the optimized parameter

settings. This integration bandwidth (IBW) method performs a data

acquisition. In this process, the reference channel integration bandwidth

(Meas. BW) is analyzed using the defined resolution bandwidth (Res. BW),

which is narrower than the channel bandwidth. The measurement

computes an average power of the channel, offset, or region over a

specified number of data acquisition, automatically compensating for

resolution bandwidth and noise bandwidth.

CH

7

7-8 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

USING EVDO ANALYZER

This section describes the analysis function to test the proper transmitter

performance of EVDO systems.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis for 1xEV-DO system.

Channel Power

Occupied Bandwidth

Spurious Emission

ACPR

Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)

OTA

Auto Measure

CH

7

7-9

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the keys used in 1x EVDO Tx Analysis mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,

the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is

completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in

predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured

selecting the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be

entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data

Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit input value. When using

the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Amplitude

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACPR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum

display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,

the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values

with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

CH

7

7-10 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the

spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

Table 30 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

!

!

CH

7

7-11

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

TRACE/DISPLAY

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is

used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

REFERENCE: Selects the relative or absolute value to be displayed.

REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.

ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

CH

7

7-12 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

CH

7

7-13

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

BW/AVG

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Trace/Display key is

used as below.

MAC CDP: Selects between Mac Index or Walsh Code. Code Domain

power changes by selecting Max index (or Walsh code).

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be

demodulated.

AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to

external memory, USB.

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an BW/AVG key is

used as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

CH

7

7-14 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

MARKER

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

CH

7

7-15

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

PEAK SEARCH

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as

below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

CH

7

7-16 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to

select measurement menu listed below.

Channel Power Measurement Occupied Bandwidth Measurement SEM Measurement ACPR Measurement Demodulator Measurement OTA Measurement Auto Measure This key is not in used when the instrument is in Channel Power,

Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, and ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key

is used as below.

THRESHOLD: Indicates which codes are considered active.

CDP TYPE: CDP type parameter is used to specify whether you are

dispreading pilot, MAC64 and Data.

LIMITS ON/OFF: Enable or Disable Limits.

CH

7

7-17EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑦ Trace Information

C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold

⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key

⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key

⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key

⑪ SEM Measurement Key

⑫ ACPR Measurement Key

⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

13

9

10

11

12

Figure 25 – Overview of 1xEVDO Tx Analyzer Display

CH

7

7-18 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

SETUP

Frequency Setup

Setup frequency information in advance is necessary to use Tx Analysis

function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with The

JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Table 31 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss was measured

Mode [Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan [Start Freq] [Stop Freq] [Center Freq]

or [Center Freq] [Span]

or [Unit] <Freq/Chan> [Channel Standard] <Select>

Set Frequency Select Chan Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow key

Amplitude [Reference Level] [Scale Division] [Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker [Marker Select] [Marker View] [Marker Type] [Marker Table] [Marker Edit] [Marker ] <Marker CF>

<Marker Start> <Marker Stop>

Set Marker Select M1 ~ M6 On/Off Normal/Delta When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table Type frequency to set Marker Set current Marker frequency to center frequency Set current Marker frequency to start frequency Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG [RBW] [VBW/RBW] [SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

7

7-19

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

External Clock Setting

Standards

To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A

must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not

supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time

base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,

therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as

signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the setup menu.

Table 32 – External Clock Operating Standard

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref

Clock

Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In

(BNC)

Manual switching

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 26 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

CH

7

7-20 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Table 33 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

Channel Power measures the integrated strength of the wireless signal

within a defined bandwidth. It is the primary measurement in the CDMA

systems. Channel power measurement of cdmaOne channel is made by

integrating the spectral density within 1.23MHz integration bandwidth

using the spectrum data from FFT. Since the JD7105A utilizes pre-defined

data points and RBW to perform the measurement, some parameters

cannot be changed.

Port Name Signal Characteristics

Even Sec Sync In PP2S

10msec

TTL compatible

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

CH

7

7-21

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

Channel Power Procedure

Channel Power Screen

The following table shows connection and procedure for Channel Power

Measurement.

Table 34 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO]

[Channel Power]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select EVDO

Select Channel Power Measurement

Figure 27 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

7

7-22 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure

Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is

defined as the bandwidth which includes 99% of the transmitted power

among total transmitted power.

Table 35 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO]

[Occupied Bandwidth]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select EVDO

Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

CH

7

7-23

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

Occupied Bandwidth Screen

The factory default SPAN of EVDO occupied BW measurement is

3.23MHz. Users can change the SPAN using the Freq/Chan key,

Figure 28 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

7

7-24 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

SPURIOUS EMISSION MASK MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure

SEM Screen

The following table shows connection and procedure for Spurious

Emission Mask Measurement.

Table 36 – EVDO Emission Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA or

LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO]

[SEM]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select EVDO

Select SEM Measurement

Figure 29 – EVDO Emission Measurement Screen

CH

7

7-25

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

ACPR MEASUREMENT

ACPR Procedure

ACPR Screen

The following table shows connection and procedure for ACPR

Measurement.

Table 37 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO]

[ACPR]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select EVDO

Select ACPR Measurement

Figure 30 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Screen

CH

7

7-26 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

CODE DOMAIN POWER

EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement

EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement

EV-DO Traffic Channel Measurement

In 1xEV-DO the code channel is not superposed simultaneously with the

transmission channels. As they are transmitted in TDM, only one channel

is transmitted at a time. Therefore, 1xEV-DO CDP measurement displays

each Walsh code power of each physical channel at a time. Also, as I-

channel and Q-channel transmit different code channel for Pilot Channel

and MAC channel, 1xEV-DO measurement displays each I/Q channels

separately unlike cdmaOne or cdma2000. 1xEV-DO CDP measures the

correlated power with Walsh code and the code channel power is

expressed in dB as it is normalized to the total signal power.

Code Domain error can occur due to wrong configuration of channel

elements consisting of each channel and/or network software, impaired

Base band, RF chain, faults in amplifiers, or I/Q gain imbalance.

Pilot Channel Power (dBm)

Waveform Quality

Time Offset

Frequency Offset

Standard for UONC Level is not applied to Pilot Channel.

MAC Channel Power (dBm)

I/Q channel Orthogonality (I/Q Impairment Test)

UOCN < -27dB

Number of Existing RA Channel > 1 ea

16 code power of traffic channel in active slot = 1/16 of the nominal

power, i.e., -12.04dB ± 0.5dB.

In idle slot, traffic channel doesn’t conform to above standard

and shows irregular code level.

CH

7

7-27

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

CDP Procedure

Table 38 – 1xEV-DO CDP Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO]

[Demodulator]

Measure Setup

[PN Offset]

[PN Inc]

[Threshold]

Auto/Manual

[CDP Type]

MAC128/MAX64/Pilot/Data

[Limit]

On/Off

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select EVDO

Select Demodulator Measurement

Set Internal Parameters

CH

7

7-28 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

CDP Procedure (Cont’d)

EV-DO Pilot Channel CDP

Active Set Threshold is the reference to differentiate active from

inactive channels and the default is -27dB.

CDP Measurement shows which channel (CH) number is currently

displayed, which can be changed using the arrow keys. In case there

is an empty CH in-between, CDP measurement is not shown and the

message indicating the measurement is in progress is displayed

continuously. In this case, pressing the arrow keys will stop the

measurement for the empty CH and moves to the next (or previous)

CH.

The Pilot Channel spreads in 32 Walsh Code and only the number “0” of

the I-channel carries the Pilot Code Channel and all the other code

channels are not used. There is no specific standard for Pilot Channel

CDP measurement, except the measurement to verify if the Pilot Code

Channel should be high enough to differentiate with the noise power of the

unoccupied channels.

Figure 31 – 1xEV-DO Pilot CDP Measurement Result

CH

7

7-29

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement Parameters

EV-DO MAC Channel CDP

Average Power: Average Power of Time Slot (dBm)

Pilot Power: Pilot Channel Power (dBm)

I/Q Max Active: Peak value among Active channel level

I/Q Average Active: Average value of Active channel level

I/Q Max InActive: Peak value among In-Active channel level

I/Q Avg InActive: Average value of In-Active channel level

PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal

Frequency Error: Measurement of the carrier’s center frequency

accuracy transmitted from the BTS. The deviation from the measured

center frequency and the specified center frequency is displayed in

Hz.

Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between BTS

transmission signal and the system time. The time offset between the

BTS reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec)

and the transmission signal.

Pilot Rho (Waveform Quality): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel

Power

Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality, including

EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along

the transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q

modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

MAC Channel uses 64 Walsh codes consisting of 1 RA (Reverse Activity)

channel, 59 RPC (Reverse Power Control) channels and 4 reserved

channels. RA channel transmits data to all AT simultaneously and RPC

channels are used to control the power level of each AT within the sector.

Information is transmitted to each I/Q channel where I-channel uses 0 ~31

and Q-channel uses 32 ~63.

CH

7

7-30 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

EV-DO MAC Channel CDP Screen

EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters

MAC Channel Walsh Channel Allocation Standard

W64i/2 for MAC Index i = 0,2,4,…,62

W64(i-1)/2 + 32 for MAC Index i = 1,3,5,…,63

In I Channel, number 0,2,4....62 Walsh channels are assigned to

number 0 to 31 Walsh code space. Thirty two channels after number

32 are not assigned to I channel.

In Q Channel, number 1,3,5....63 Walsh channels are assigned to

number 33 to 63 Walsh code space. Thirty two channels, from

number 0 to 31 channels, are not assigned to Q channel.

Average Power: Average Power of Time Slot (dBm)

Pilot Power: MAC Channel Power (dBm)

I/Q Max Active: Peak value among Active channel levels

I/Q Average Active: Average value of Active channel levels

I/Q Max InActive: Peak value among In-Active channel levels

I/Q Avg InActive: Average value of In-Active channel levels

PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal

Figure 32 – 1xEV-DO MAC CDP Measurement Result

CH

7

7-31

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters (cont’d)

Required Specification for EV-DO MAC Channel

EV-DO Data Channel Measurement

Frequency Error: Measurement for the carrier’s center frequency

accuracy transmitted from the BTS. The measured deviation from the

center frequency and the specified center frequency displayed in Hz.

Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between the BTS

transmission signal and the system time. Time offset between BTS

reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec) and

transmission signal.

MAC Rho (Waveform Quality): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel

Power

Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality including EVM

and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along the

transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q

modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

3GPP2 recommends UOCN to be under -27dB in 1xEV-DO MAC CDP.

Traffic channel spreads in W16 Walsh code and 16 code channels are

assigned to a single user, not all 16 channels are users, data transmission,

I-channels, and Q-channels are assigned the same codes unlike MAC or

Pilot Channel. Therefore I/Q is not displayed separately in Traffic Channel

and the sum of I/Q power is displayed like cdmaOne and cdma2000.

CH

7

7-32 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

EV-DO Data Channel Measurement Screen

EV-DO Traffic CDP Measurement Parameters

Max Active: Peak value among Traffic code channels

Average Active: Average value of Traffic code channels

Average Power: Average power (dBm) of Time Slot

PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal

Frequency Error: Measurement for the carrier’s center frequency

accuracy transmitted from BTS. The measured deviation from center

frequency and the specified center frequency displayed in Hz.

Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between BTS

transmission signal and the system time. Time offset between BTS

reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec) and

transmission signal.

Waveform Quality (Rho): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel Power

Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality including

EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along

the transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q

modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

Figure 33 – 1xEV-DO Data Measurement Result (Idle Slot)

CH

7

7-33

EVDO TX ANALYZER

Chapter 7

Required Specification for EV-DO Traffic Channel

3GPP2 requires for active slots, that the size of each Walsh channel

power is 1/16 of the nominal power.

In Active slot, the size of each Walsh channel power is 1/16 of the

nominal power.

Nominal Power/16= 0.0625= -12.04dB

Single Walsh channel power = -12.04±0.5 dB

CH

8

8-1 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

8.0 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter

WCDMA Analyzer Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

What is WCDMA ................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 8-4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concept ........................................................................................ 8-4 Spurious Emission Mask Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 8-5 ACLR Measurement Concept ............................................................................................................... 8-5 Code Domain Measurement Concept ................................................................................................... 8-6 Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concept.............................................................................. 8-6

Using WCDMA Analyzer ............................................................................................................................... 8-7 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 8-8

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 8-10 BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 8-12 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 8-13 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 8-14 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 8-15 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 8-15 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 8-16 Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 8-17

Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 8-17 External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 8-18

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 8-20 Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................................... 8-20 Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 8-21

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 8-21 Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 8-22 Occupied Bandwidth Screen ....................................................................................................... 8-22

Spurious Emission Measurement ....................................................................................................... 8-23 SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 8-23 SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 8-24

ACLR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 8-24 ACLR Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 8-25 ACLR Screen .............................................................................................................................. 8-25

Code Domain Analysis (Demodulator) ................................................................................................ 8-26 CDP Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 CDP Screen ................................................................................................................................ 8-27

WCDMA OTA Measurement ............................................................................................................... 8-28 OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 8-28 OTA Measurement Screen .......................................................................................................... 8-29

CH

8

8-2 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

WCDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

WCDMA is a wideband spread-spectrum mobile air interface that utilizes

the direct sequence Code Division Multiple Access signaling method (or

CDMA) to achieve higher speeds and support more users compared to

the implementation of time division multiplexing (TDMA) used by 2G GSM

networks.

Features:

Radio channels are 5MHz wide.

Chip rate of 3.84 Mcps

Supports two basic duplex modes, frequency division and time

division. Current systems use frequency division, one frequency for

uplink and another for downlink. For time division, FOMA uses 16

slots per radio frame, where as UMTS uses 15 slots per radio frame.

Employs coherent detection on uplink and downlink based on the use

of pilot symbols.

Supports inter-cell asynchronous operation.

Variable mission on a 10 ms frame basis.

Multi-code transmission.

Adaptive power control based on SIR (Signal-to-Interference Ratio).

Multiuser detection and smart antennas can be used to increase

capacity and coverage.

Multiple types of handoff between different cells including soft handoff,

softer handoff and hard handoff.

CH

8

8-3 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

WHAT IS WCDMA

W-CDMA is a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system. As opposed

to Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), in CDMA, all users transmit at

the same time. Frequency divisions are still used, but at a much greater

bandwidth.

In addition, multiple users share the same frequency carrier. Each user’s

signal uses a unique code that appears to be noise except to the correct

receiver. Therefore, the term channel describes a combination of carrier

frequency and codes. Correlation techniques allow a receiver to decode

one signal among many transmitted on the same carrier at the same time.

A difference between W-CDMA and earlier 2G CDMA systems (like IS-95)

is that W-CDMA uses a wider bandwidth (3.84 MHz, as opposed to 1.23

MHz for IS-95).

W-CDMA is a direct sequence spread-spectrum that supports wider RF

bandwidths, typically from 5 to 20 MHz. W-CDMA uses correlative codes

to distinguish one user from another. Frequency division is still used, as is

done with Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) and Time Division

Multiple Access (TDMA), but in a much larger bandwidth such as 5 MHz or

greater. An initial baseband data rate is spread to a transmitted bit rate of

3.840 Mcps, which is also called chip rate or spread data rate. W-CDMA

realizes increased capacity from 1:1 frequency reuse and sectored cells.

The capacity limit is soft. That is, capacity can be increased with some

degradation of the error rate or voice quality.

CH

8

8-4 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless

industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined

frequency channel. This procedure measures the total power within the

defined channel for W-CDMA. This measurement is applied to design,

characterize, evaluate, and verify transmitters and their components or

devices for base stations and mobile stations.

The Channel Power measurement shows the total transmitted power

within the channel integration bandwidth, 5.00 MHz for the W-CDMA mode.

The measurement acquires a number of points representing the input

signal in the time domain. It transforms this information into the frequency

domain using FFT and then calculates the channel power.

To improve repeatability, the number of averaging is increased. The

channel power graph is shown in the graph window, while the absolute

channel power in dBm and the mean power spectral density in dBm/Hz

are shown in the text window.

Occupied Bandwidth measures the bandwidth containing 99% of the

total transmitted power. The spectrum shape of a W-CDMA signal can give

a useful qualitative insight into the transmitter’s operation. Any distortion to

the spectrum shape might be an indication of degradation of the

transmitter's performance.

With the instrument tuned to a fixed center frequency, samples are

digitized at a high rate with DSP hardware, and then converted to the

frequency domain with FFT software.

The total absolute power within the measurement frequency span is

integrated for its 100% of power. The lower and upper frequencies

containing 0.5% each of the total power are then calculated to get 99.0%

bandwidth.

CH

8

8-5 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

SPURIOUS EMISSION MASK MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

ACLR MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement includes the in-

band and out-of-band spurious emissions. As it applies to W-CDMA, this is

the power contained in a specified frequency bandwidth, at certain offsets,

relative to the total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of

power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset

frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-

growth and emissions produced by components and circuit blocks, without

the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or

region frequencies and relates them to the carrier power. The reference

channel integration bandwidth method is used to measure the carrier

channel power and offset or region powers. When Offset is selected, SEM

measurements are made relative to the carrier channel frequency

bandwidth. When Region is selected, absolute SEM measurements are

made, specifying the start and stop RF frequencies. In this process, the

reference channel integration bandwidth is analyzed using the

automatically defined resolution bandwidth, which is much narrower than

the channel bandwidth. The results are displayed both as relative power in

dBc, and as absolute power in dBm.

Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), as it applies to W-CDMA, is the

power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the

total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral

densities between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band. This

is also called Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR).

ACPR combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications to provide

useful figures-of-merit for spectral re-growth and emissions produced by

components and circuit blocks without the rigor of performing a full SEM

measurement.

CH

8

8-6 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

CODE DOMAIN MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

MODULATION ACCURACY (RHO) MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

Code domain power is an analysis of the distribution of signal power

across the set of code channels, normalized to the total signal power. To

analyze the composite waveform, each channel is decoded using a code-

correlation algorithm. This algorithm determines the correlation coefficient

factor for each code. Once the channels are decoded, the power in each

code channel is determined. Since the code domain measurements de-

spread and descramble the W-CDMA signal into its physical channels, the

number of active channels of various symbol rates (which are denoted by

widths) can be observed. The width of the channel is inversely

proportional to the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) code

length in number of bits. In the code domain, there is a fixed amount of

code space for a given chip rate. Therefore, by using the different OVSF

codes, the system can dynamically allocate the code space for lower rate

voice users versus high speed data users.

The code domain power composite view provides information about the in-

channel characteristics of the W-CDMA signal. It directly informs the user

of the active channels with their individual channel power. The composite

view also shows which data rates are active and the corresponding

amount of code space used.

Error vector magnitude (EVM) is defined in 3GPP conformance tests for

both downlink and uplink. EVM is a common modulation quality metric

widely used in digital communications. Mod accuracy (composite EVM)

measures the EVM of the multi-code channel signal. It is valuable for

evaluating the quality of the transmitter for a multi-channel signal,

detecting spreading or scrambling errors, identifying certain problems

between baseband and RF sections, and analyzing errors that cause high

interference in the signal.

Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM and

Code Domain Power. Rho is the ratio of the correlated power in a multi

coded channel to the total signal power. This measurement takes into

account all possible error mechanisms in the entire transmission chain

including: baseband filtering, I/Q modulation anomalies, filter amplitude,

phase deviation, and power amplifier distortions. This provides an overall

indication of the performance level of the transmitter.

CH

8

8-7 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

USING WCDMA ANALYZER

This section provides details about the W-CDMA communications system

and explains how the various measurements are performed by the

instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for WCDMA system.

Channel Power

Occupied Bandwidth

Spurious Emission

ACPR (ACLR)

Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)

OTA

Auto Measure

CH

8

8-8 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section describes the instrument’s keys used in WCDMA Tx Analyzer

mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,

the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is

completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in

predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured

selecting the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be

entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data

Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.

When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased

by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Amplitude

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

or ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum

display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,

the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values

with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

CH

8

8-9 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the

spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

Table 39 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

!

!

CH

8

8-10 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

TRACE/DISPLAY

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is

used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

REFERENCE: Selects the relative or absolute value to be displayed.

REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.

ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, or

SEM measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

CH

8

8-11 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

CH

8

8-12 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

BW/AVG

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, the following keys are

also available.

VIEW (ZOOM, FULL): Selects Full or Zoomed screen

POSITION: Assigns the zoom start position

WIDTH (32, 64, 128, 256): Selects the Walsh code width to be displayed

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be

demodulated.

AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to

external memory, USB.

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the

trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a BW/AVG key is used

as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

CH

8

8-13 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

MARKER

This key is not used in ACLR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

or Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

CH

8

8-14 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

PEAK SEARCH

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

or Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as

below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

CH

8

8-15 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to

select measurement menu listed below.

Channel Power Measurement Occupied Bandwidth Measurement SEM Measurement ACLR Measurement Demodulator Measurement OTA Measurement Auto Measure

This key is not used in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACLR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup Key

is used as below.

SCRAMBLE: Selects the scramble code between Auto and Manual.

THRESHOLD: Sets the threshold value between Auto and Manual (default

is -27dBm).

S-CCPCH

S-CCPCH Enable: On/Off

Spreading Factor

Channel No

PICH

S-CCPCH Enable: On/Off

Spreading Factor

Channel No

LIMIT: Sets the limit on and off.

CH

8

8-16 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑦ Trace Information

C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold

⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key

⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key

⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key

⑪ SEM Measurement Key

⑫ ACLR Measurement Key

⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

13

9

10

11

12

Figure 34 – Overview of WCDMA Tx Analyzer Display

CH

8

8-17 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

SETUP

Frequency Setup

It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx

Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the

JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Table 40 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss was measured

Mode [Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan [Start Freq] [Stop Freq] [Center Freq]

or [Center Freq] [Span]

or [Unit] <Freq/Chan> [Channel Standard] <Select>

Set Frequency Select Chan Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow key

Amplitude [Reference Level] [Scale Division] [Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker [Marker Select] [Marker View] [Marker Type] [Marker Table] [Marker Edit] [Marker ] <Marker CF>

<Marker Start> <Marker Stop>

Set Marker Select M1 ~ M6 On/Off Normal/Delta When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table Type frequency to set Marker Set current Marker frequency to center frequency Set current Marker frequency to start frequency Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG [RBW] [VBW/RBW] [SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

8

8-18 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

External Clock Setting

Standards

To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A

must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not

supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time

base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,

therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as

signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Table 41 – External Clock Operating Standard

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref

Clock

Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In

(BNC)

Manual switching

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 35 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

CH

8

8-19 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification

Table 42 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

Port Name Signal Characteristics

Even Sec Sync In PP2S

10msec

TTL compatible

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

CH

8

8-20 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Channel Power Procedure

The channel power measurement identifies the channel power within a

specified bandwidth (default is 5 MHz, as per the Third-Generation

Partnership Project (3GPP) W-CDMA technical specifications) and the

power spectral density (PSD) in dBm/Hz.

Table 43 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA or

LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA]

[Channel Power]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select Channel Power Measurement

CH

8

8-21 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

Channel Power Screen

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT

The 3GPP specifications requires the occupied bandwidth (OBW) of a

transmitted W-CDMA signal to be less than 5 MHz, where occupied

bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing 99% of the total channel

power. In this measurement, the total power of the displayed span is

measured. Then the power is measured inward from the right and left

extremes until 0.5% of the power is accounted for each of the upper and

lower part of the span and the calculated difference is the occupied

bandwidth.

Figure 36 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

8

8-22 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure

Occupied Bandwidth Screen

Following table shows connection and procedure for Occupied Bandwidth

Measurement.

Table 44 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA]

[Occupied Bandwidth]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Figure 37 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

8

8-23 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

SPURIOUS EMISSION MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure

The SEM (Spectrum Emission Mask) measurement required by 3GPP

specifications encompasses different power limits and different

measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency

offsets.

Table 45 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA]

[SEM]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select SEM Measurement

CH

8

8-24 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

SEM Screen

ACLR MEASUREMENT

The ACPR, designated by the 3GPP W-CDMA specifications as the

adjacent channel leakage power ratio (ACLR), is a measure of the power

in adjacent channels relative to the transmitted power. The standard

requires the power of both the transmitted and adjacent channels be

measured through a root raised cosine filter (RRC) with a roll-off factor of

0.22. The W-CDMA ACPR measurement performed in this exercise can

measure up to five adjacent channel pairs with 3GPP compliance. The

RRC filter defaults to “On” when the measurement is first activated, but

may be disabled.

Figure 38 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Screen

CH

8

8-25 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

ACLR Procedure

ACLR Screen

Table 46 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA]

[ACLR]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select ACLR Measurement

Figure 39 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Screen

CH

8

8-26 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

CODE DOMAIN ANALYSIS (DEMODULATOR)

CDP Procedure

The CDP (Code Domain Power) analysis measurement provides a variety

of different results. First, the code domain power analysis measures the

distribution of power across the set of code channels, normalized to the

total power. This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is

operating at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the

transmitter design from coding to the RF section. System imperfections,

such as amplifier non-linearity, will present themselves as an undesired

distribution of power in the code domain.

Table 47 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA]

[Demodulator]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select Demodulator Measurement

CH

8

8-27 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

CDP Screen

Figure 40 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Full Screen

Figure 41 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Zoomed Screen

CH

8

8-28 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

WCDMA OTA MEASUREMENT

OTA Measurement Procedure

The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for

a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is

especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or

physical connection is not available.

Table 48 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to JD7105AGPS port.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

BTS

Modulated signal (CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna (Omni or Directional)

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

GPS Antenna

Mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[WCDMA]

[OTA]

Measure Setup

Scramble Code, Auto/Manual

Threshold, Auto/Manual

S-CCPCH,

S-CCPCH Enable/On/Off

Spreading Factor/Enter numeric values

Channel No./Enter numeric values

PICH,

PICH Enable/On/Off

Spreading Factor/Enter numeric values

Channel No./Enter numeric values

Limits

On/Off

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select WCDMA

Select OTA Measurement

Set Internal Measurement Parameters

CH

8

8-29 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

OTA Measurement Screen

SC Scanner

WCDMA mobile receives signals from multiple base stations, and that

all of these signals share the same spectrum and are present at the

same time, every base station is assigned with unique scrambling

codes differentiating its signal from other base stations in the area.

Multi-path Profile

Multipath profile indicates the amount of power of the dominant pilot

signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to

multipath echoes (expressed in dB). Ideally, this value should be

very small. Multipath profile is the result of portions of the original

broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna out of phase. This

can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects, such as

buildings, or being refracted through the atmosphere differently from

the main signal.

Note that the Multipath Profile is only valid for Over the Air

measurements. It does not apply to Transmitter measurements.

Figure 42 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Screen

CH

8

8-30 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 8

Code Domain

Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active

channels and are indicated as such on the display. Once the

channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power of each

channel relative to the total signal power.

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating

at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the

transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System

imperfections, such as the non-linearity of amplifiers, will present

themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code domain.

Channel Power (dBm)

The channel power measurement indicates the channel power within

a specified bandwidth (default of 3.84MHz).

CPICH Power (dBm)

The CPICH power is the total power in the dominant pilot signal,

expressed in dBm.

Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Satellites Information

If a GPS antenna is supplied and locked to the satellites, then the

positioning information will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

CH

9

9-1 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

9.0 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

In this chapter

GSM/EDGE Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................................ 9-2

What is GSM ........................................................................................................................................ 9-3 Time Slot ............................................................................................................................................... 9-4 Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 9-4 Spurious Emission Measurement Concept ........................................................................................... 9-4 Code Domain Measurement Concept (Demodulator) ........................................................................... 9-5 Phase & Frequency Error Measurement Concept ................................................................................ 9-5 Baseband I/Q Measurement Concept ................................................................................................... 9-6

Using GSM/EDGE Tx Analyzer .................................................................................................................... 9-7 How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 9-8

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 9-8 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................. 9-8 Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 9-10 BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................9-11 Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 9-12 Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 9-13 Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 9-13 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 9-14 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 9-15 Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 9-16

Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 9-16 External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 9-17

Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 9-19 Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................................... 9-19 Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 9-20

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 9-21 Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 9-21 Occupied Bandwidth Screen ....................................................................................................... 9-22

Spurious Emissions Measurement ..................................................................................................... 9-23 SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 9-23 SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 9-23

Power vs. Time Measurement ............................................................................................................ 9-24 PvT Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 9-24 PvT Screens ............................................................................................................................... 9-25

I/Q Polar Vector Measurement ........................................................................................................... 9-26 I/Q Polar Vector Procedure ......................................................................................................... 9-26 I/Q Polar Vector Screen .............................................................................................................. 9-27

I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement ................................................................................................... 9-28 I/Q Demodulated Bits Procedure ................................................................................................ 9-28 I/Q Demodulated Bits Screen ..................................................................................................... 9-29

GSM OTA Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 9-30 OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 9-30 OTA Measurement Screen .......................................................................................................... 9-31

CH

9

9-2 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

GSM/EDGE ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) is a digital cellular

standard that uses time division multiple access (TDMA) multiplexing

scheme and Gaussian minimum shift keying (GMSK) modulation.

EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution), is an enhancement to

GSM that promises to deliver true third-generation (3G) wireless services

such as multimedia and other broadband applications. It uses TDMA and

3π/8 8PSK (phase shift keying) modulation.

The GSM standards define a radio communications system that works

properly only if each component operates within precise specifications.

Essentially, a compromise is established between the link quality

experienced by an individual user and the level of interference

experienced by others. Mobiles and base stations must transmit enough

power, with sufficient fidelity to maintain a call with acceptable quality,

without transmitting excessive power into the frequency channels and

timeslots allocated to others. Receivers must have adequate sensitivity

and selectivity to acquire and demodulate a low-level signal.

This section presents the fundamental RF parametric measurements

necessary to characterize GSM/EDGE base transceiver stations and their

components.

CH

9

9-3 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

WHAT IS GSM

GSM standard defines a voice and data over-air interface between a

mobile radio and the system infrastructure. EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates

for GSM Evolution) enhances the GSM standard by implementing a new

modulation format and filtering designed to provide higher data rates in the

same spectrum. EDGE and GSM signals can be transmitted on the same

frequency, occupying different timeslots, and both use existing GSM

equipment. The GSM digital communications standard employs an 8:1

TDMA, allowing eight channels to use one carrier frequency

simultaneously. The 270.833 kbits/second raw bit rate is modulated on the

RF carrier using Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK). The standard

includes multiple traffic channels, a control channel, and a cell broadcast

channel.

The GSM specification defines a channel spacing of 200 kHz. GSM 900,

GSM 450, GSM 480, GSM 850, DCS 1800, and PCS 1900 are GSM-

defined frequency bands. The term GSM 900 is used for any GSM or

EDGE system operating in the 900 MHz band, which includes P-GSM, E-

GSM, and R-GSM.

Primary (or standard) GSM 900 band (P-GSM) is the original GSM band.

Extended GSM 900 band (E-GSM) includes all the P-GSM bands and an

additional 50 channels. Railway GSM 900 band (R-GSM) includes all the

E-GSM band plus additional channels. GSM 450, GSM 480, GSM 700,

and GSM 850 are additional GSM-defined frequency bands that provide

additional bandwidth availability.

DCS 1800 is an adaptation of GSM 900, created to allow smaller cell sizes

for higher system capacity. PCS 1900 is intended to be identical to DCS

1800 except for frequency allocation and power levels. The term GSM

1800 is sometimes used for DCS 1800, and the term GSM 1900 is

sometimes used for PCS 1900.

CH

9

9-4 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

TIME SLOT

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

SPURIOUS EMISSION MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

EDGE and GSM use Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) which divides

each RF channel into eight individual timeslots, thus allowing eight users

to share a single carrier frequency. Users are synchronized to transmit in

series, each in their assigned timeslot. A user may only transmit every

4.62 ms during their timeslot which is 577 μs long. The eight timeslots are

numbered 0 to 7. The 4.62 ms required to cycle through all eight timeslots

is called a frame.

The Channel Power measures in-channel power for GSM and EDGE

systems. GSM and EDGE systems use dynamic power control to ensure

that each link is maintained with minimum power. This gives two

fundamental benefits: overall system interference is kept to a minimum

and, in the case of mobile stations, battery life is maximized. The Channel

Power measurement determines the average power of an RF signal burst

at or above a specified threshold value. The threshold value may be

absolute, or relative to the peak value of the signal.

The purpose of the Channel Power measurement is to determine the

power delivered to the antenna system on the RF channel under test. The

instrument acquires a GSM or EDGE signal in the time domain. The

average power level above the threshold is then computed and displayed.

The Tx Band Spur measurement verifies the transmitter is not

transmitting undesirable energy into the transmitted band. This energy

may cause interference to other users on the GSM system.

The modulation process in a transmitter causes the continuous wave

(CW) carrier to spread spectrally. This is referred to as “spectrum due to

modulation and wideband noise.” Defects in the transmission chain may

cause the spectrum to excessively spread, resulting in interference with

other frequency bands. Measuring the spectrum due to modulation can be

thought of as making an adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement

where several adjacent channels are considered. GSM transmitters ramp

RF power rapidly. The transmitted RF carrier power versus time

measurement is used to ensure that this process happens at the correct

times and fast enough.

CH

9

9-5 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

CODE DOMAIN MEASUREMENT CONCEPT (DEMODULATOR)

PHASE & FREQUENCY ERROR MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

However, if RF power is ramped too quickly, undesirable spectral

components will arise in the transmitted signal. This upsets the “spectrum

due to switching,” which again results in interference with other frequency

bands. Spectrum due to modulation and spectrum due to switching

measurements are usually grouped together and known as the output RF

spectrum. The GSM 3GPP specifications have particular restrictions on

output RF spectrum for a series of frequencies. Verification of compliance

with the 3GPP requires up to 80 dB of dynamic range.

Power vs. Time, Power vs. Time (PvT) measures the mean transmission

power during the “useful part” of GSM bursts and verifies that the power

ramp fits within the defined mask. PvT also lets you view the rise, fall, and

“useful part” of the GSM burst. Using the “Multi-Slot” function, up to eight

slots in a frame can be viewed at a time. GSM is a TDMA scheme with

eight time slots, or bursts, per RF channel; if the burst does not occur at

exactly the right time, or if the burst is irregular, then other adjacent

timeslots can experience interference. Because of this, the industry

standards specify a tight mask for the TDMA burst.

The PvT measurement provides masks for both BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and MS (mobile station). The timing masks are referenced to the

transition from bit 13 to bit 14 of the mid-amble training sequence. For

GMSK measurements, the 0 dB reference is determined by measuring the

mean transmitted power during the “useful part” of the burst.

Phase and frequency error are the measurements of modulation quality

for GSM. Since GSM uses relative phase to transmit information, the

phase and frequency accuracy of the transmitter are critical to the system

performance and ultimately transmission coverage.

GSM receivers rely on the phase and frequency quality of the 0.3 GMSK

signal in order to achieve the expected carrier to noise performance. A

transmitter with high phase and frequency error is often still able to

support phone calls during a functional test. However, it tends to be more

difficult for mobiles to maintain communication at the edges of the cell,

with low signal levels, or under fading and doppler conditions.

CH

9

9-6 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

BASEBAND I/Q MEASUREMENT CONCEPT

The phase error of the signal is measured by computing the difference

between the phase of the transmitted signal and the phase of a

theoretically signal. The instrument samples the transmitter output in order

to capture the actual phase trajectory. This is then demodulated and the

ideal phase trajectory is mathematically derived. The error signal is

obtained by subtracting one from the other.

This measurement displays the frequency and phase errors numerically

and graphically, showing the binary representation of the demodulated

data bits.

In transmitters, the baseband I/Q refers to signals that are composed of

individual I/Q modulators, before the I and Q component signals are

combined, and before the up-conversion to IF or RF frequencies. In

receivers, baseband I/Q analysis is used to test the I and Q components

of I/Q demodulators, after an RF signal has been down-converted and

demodulated.

Many measurements related to the characteristics of I and Q signals can

be made when mixed and up-converted to signals in the RF spectrum.

However, measurements which relate to the characteristics of an up-

converted signal that lie beyond the bandwidth available to the baseband

I/Q Input circuit can not be measured (the limits are up to 5 MHz

bandwidth for individual I and Q signals, and up to 10 MHz for composite

I/Q signals).

Some measurements are appropriate for use with both RF and baseband

I/Q signals without any modification, while others must be altered. Some

examples of measurements with identical results are QPSK EVM, Code

Domain, and CCDF. For Spectrum measurements, identical results include

the I and Q waveform and the I/Q polar representation. For waveform

measurements, identical results include I/Q waveform view, signal

envelope view, and I/Q polar view.

At RF frequencies, power measurements are conventionally displayed on

a logarithmic vertical scale in dBm, whereas measurements of baseband

signals using baseband I/Q inputs may be conveniently displayed as

voltage using a linear vertical scale as well as a log scale.

CH

9

9-7 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

USING GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

This section provides details about the GSM and EDGE communications

system and explains how the various measurements are performed by the

instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for GSM/EDGE system.

Channel Power

Occupied Bandwidth

RMS Phase Error

Peak Phase Error

Power vs. Time (Slot, Frame)

Frequency Error

TSC Code

IQ Origin Offset

Constellation

Data Bit Analysis

OTA

Auto Measure

CH

9

9-8 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in GSM Tx Analyzer

mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry

keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the

input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When

the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in

predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the center frequency step units; values can be entered

with the data entry key or the knob. When the data entry keys are used,

the input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value on the

screen key. When the knob is used, the incremental value is 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Amplitude

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the

graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is

selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum

values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

CH

9

9-9 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using

spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

Table 49 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

!

!

CH

9

9-10 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

TRACE/DISPLAY

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Scanner mode, there is an

additional menu as described below.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the

spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

This key is not used in GSM Analyzer measurement mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Spectrum measurement mode, a

Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

CH

9

9-11 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

BW/AVG

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller

trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

When the instrument is in Channel Scanner mode, a Trace/Display

key is used as below.

ZOOM START FREQ: Selects the start frequency of the zoom screen.

AVERAGE: Sets the average number of traces. A maximum of 99 times of

averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

CH

9

9-12 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

MARKER

This key is not used in GSM/EDGE Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in GSM/EDGE Spectrum or Channel Scanner

mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

CH

9

9-13 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

This key is not used in GSM Analyzer and Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Spectrum mode, a Peak Search key

is used as below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to

select measurement menu listed below.

Channel Scanner Measurement

Channel Power Measurement

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

SEM Measurement

Demodulator Measurement

OTA Measurement

Auto Measure

CH

9

9-14 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

MEASURE SETUP

This key is not used in Channel Scanner measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM

and Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup Key is used as below.

GSM/EDGE: Selects the GSM/EDGE signal standards (auto-detect is

default).

TRIGGER: Selects the trigger sources.

RF BURST: Sets the trigger level when using the RF Burst

(wideband) Trigger. The value is relative to the peak of the signal.

RF Burst is also known as RF Envelope.

INTERNAL FB (FREE BURST): Sets the trigger level to FB if

there is a Frequency Burst signal.

RF BURST & TS (TRAINING SEQUENCE): Sets the trigger level

to Training Sequence Code.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Auto Trigger).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger level to external sync reference.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

RX FILTER: Sets the internal Rx filter bandwidth (100k/200k/400k/624k)

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset on the center frequency

PSK

PSK DC Offset: Sets the PSK DC Offset

PSK Constellation: Sets the PSK constellation observation mode

CH

9

9-15GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ Delay & Trigger Mode Setting Information

⑤ GSM/EDGE Selection Information

⑥ Rx (Receive) Filter Setting Information

⑦ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑧ Frequency Offset Information

⑨ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key

⑩ Channel Power Measurement Key

⑪ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key

⑫ SEM Measurement Key

⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key (PvsT-Slot

or Frame, I/Q Polar Vector, Data Bit Measurement)

⑭ Channel Scanner Measurement

Figure 43 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display

CH

9

9-16 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

SETUP

Frequency Setup

It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx

Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the

JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Table 50 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss was measured

Mode [Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan [Start Freq] [Stop Freq] [Center Freq]

or [Center Freq] [Span]

or [Unit] <Freq/Chan> [Channel Standard] <Select>

Set Frequency Select Chan Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow key

Amplitude [Reference Level] [Scale Division] [Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker [Marker Select] [Marker View] [Marker Type] [Marker Table] [Marker Edit] [Marker ] <Marker CF>

<Marker Start> <Marker Stop>

Set Marker Select M1 ~ M6 On/Off Normal/Delta When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table Type frequency to set Marker Set current Marker frequency to center frequency Set current Marker frequency to start frequency Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG [RBW] [VBW/RBW] [SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

9

9-17 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

External Clock Setting

Standards

To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A

must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not

supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time

base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,

therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as

signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Table 51 – External Clock Operating Standard

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref

Clock

Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In

(BNC)

Manual switching

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 44 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

CH

9

9-18 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification

Table 52 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

Port Name Signal Characteristics

Even Sec Sync In PP2S

10msec

TTL compatible

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

CH

9

9-19 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Channel Power Procedure

The carrier power measures the in-channel power of GSM systems.

Mobile devices and base stations must transmit enough power with

sufficient modulation accuracy to maintain a call of acceptable quality

without a power leaking into other frequency channels or timeslots. GSM

systems use dynamic power control to ensure that each link is maintained

with minimum power.

Table 53 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[Channel Power]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM

Select Channel Power Measurement

CH

9

9-20 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

Channel Power Screen

Figure 45 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-21 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure

It determines the frequency bandwidth that that contains 99% of the total

radiated power.

Table 54 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[Occupied Bandwidth]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM

Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

CH

9

9-22 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

Occupied Bandwidth Screen

Figure 46 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-23 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

SPURIOUS EMISSIONS MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure

SEM Screen

The SEM (Spur Emission Mask) measurement verifies that the transmitter

does not transmit undesirable energy into the transmission band. This

energy may cause interference for other users of the GSM system.

Table 55 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA or

LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[SEM]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM

Select SEM Measurement

Figure 47 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-24 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

POWER VS. TIME MEASUREMENT

PvT Procedure

GSM is a TDMA multiplexing scheme with eight time slots, or bursts, per

frequency channel. If the burst does not occur at exactly the right time, or

if the burst is irregular, then adjacent channels can experience

interference. Because of this, industry standards specify a tight mask for

the fit of the TDMA burst.

Table 56 – GSM/EDGE P vs T Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[Demodulators]

[P vs T (Slot)] or [P vs T (Frame)]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM

Select Demodulators

Select P vs T Slot or Frame Measurement

CH

9

9-25 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

PvT Screens

Figure 48 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen

Figure 49 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-26 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

I/Q POLAR VECTOR MEASUREMENT

I/Q Polar Vector Procedure

Phase and frequency error measurements characterize the modulation

quality of GSM systems. Since GSM systems use relative phase to

transmit information, phase and frequency accuracy is critical to the

system’s performance. In a real system, poor phase error will reduce the

ability of a receiver to correctly demodulate.

Constellation diagrams can also be used to observe some aspects of

modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault mechanisms such as I/Q

amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance.

Table 57 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Polar Vector Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[Demodulators]

[Demodulator]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM

Select Demodulators

Select Demodulator Measurement

CH

9

9-27 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

I/Q Polar Vector Screen

Figure 50 – GSM Polar Vector Measurement Screen

Figure 51 – EDGE Polar Vector Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-28 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

I/Q DEMODULATED BITS MEASUREMENT

I/Q Demodulated Bits Procedure

Provides a view of the numeric results and data bits. The demodulated bits

in this display are Symbol State bits, and do not represent encoded

message data.

Table 58 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM]

[Demodulators]

[Data Bit]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM/EDGE

Select Demodulators

Select Data Bit

CH

9

9-29 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

I/Q Demodulated Bits Screen

Figure 52 – GSM Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen

Figure 53 – EDGE Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen

CH

9

9-30 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

GSM OTA MEASUREMENT

OTA Measurement Procedure

The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for

a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is

especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or

physical connection is not available.

Table 59 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to the JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to the JD7105A GPS port.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

BTS

Modulated signal (CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna (Omni or Directional)

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

GPS Antenna

Mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[GSM]

[OTA]

Measure Setup

GSM/EDGE, Auto/GSM/EDGE

Trigger,

RF Burst/Internal FB/

RF Burst & TS/Free/External

Delay, Enter numeric values

Rx Filter,

No Filter/100K,200K,400K,624K, Default

CF Offset, Enter numeric values

PSK,

PSK DC Offset/On/Off

PSK Constellation/On/Off

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select GSM/EDGE

Select OTA Measurement

Set Internal Measurement Parameters

Select the signal standards.

Select the triiger sources.

Set the delay.

Set the type of internal Rx Filter.

Set the CF Offset.

Enable/Disable PSK DC offset and Signal

Constellation.

CH

9

9-31 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

OTA Measurement Screen

Rx Power vs. C/I

Channel power measures in a GSM/EDGE frame and C/I (Carrier to

Interference Signal Ratio). The green plot corresponds to the

Received Power (Rx Power) and the yellow plot corresponds to C/I.

Multi-path Profile & Information

Multipath profile the amount of power, of the dominant signal, that is

dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to multipath echoes

(expressed in dB).

Also SNR of these multi-path signals are shown in the Multi-path

information column.

Rx Power

Channel power measures the average power in a GSM/EDGE frame

in the frequency specified. Out of specification power indicates

system faults. Channel power is expressed in dBm.

BSIC

It is the Base Station Identity Code.

Figure 54 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Screen

CH

9

9-32 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Chapter 9

Frame No

TDMA frames are numbered by a frame number (FN). The frame

number is cyclic and have a range of 0 to 3h 28min 53s 760ms as

defined in 3GPP TS 45.010. The frame number will be incremented at

the end of each TDMA frame.

Frame Time

The time contained in the measured frame.

C/I (Carrier to Interference Ratio)

Carrier to Interference Ratio is the ratio of the desired carrier power to

the undesired interference signal power in dB.

Frequency Error

The increase in frequency error of a GSM input signal, which meets

the frequency accuracy requirements of 3GPP recommendation, shall

be lower than 0.05ppm

Burst Power

Burst power is the average power over the useful part of the first

active burst GSM/EDGE slot. A GSM/EDGE signal has eight time

slots in a frame.

Modulation Type

The modulation type indicates the detected modulation from the

received signal, the GSM uses GMSK and the EDGE uses 8PSK.

Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Satellites Information

If GPS antenna used and locked to the GPS satellite, then the

positioning information will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

CH

10

10-1 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

10.0 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter

TD-SCDMA Analyzer Introduction .............................................................................................................. 10-2

Frame Structure .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 Time Slot ............................................................................................................................................. 10-4 DwPTS ............................................................................................................................................... 10-5 UpPTS ................................................................................................................................................ 10-5 GP ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-5 FDD vs. TDD ...................................................................................................................................... 10-5

Using TD-SCDMA Tx Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 10-6 How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 10-7

Freq/Chan ........................................................................................................................................... 10-7 Amplitude ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7 Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 10-9 BW/AVG............................................................................................................................................ 10-10 Marker .............................................................................................................................................. 10-10 Peak Search ..................................................................................................................................... 10-12 Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 10-12 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 10-13 Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 10-16 Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 10-17

Frequency Setup ...................................................................................................................... 10-17 External Clock Setting .............................................................................................................. 10-18

Channel Power Measurement .......................................................................................................... 10-19 Channel Power Procedure ........................................................................................................ 10-19 Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................. 10-20

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................. 10-21 Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ............................................................................................... 10-21 Occupied Bandwidth Screen ..................................................................................................... 10-22

Spectrum Emissions Measurement .................................................................................................. 10-23 SEM Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 10-23 SEM Screen.............................................................................................................................. 10-23

ACLR Measurement ......................................................................................................................... 10-24 ACLR Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 10-24 ACLR Screen ............................................................................................................................ 10-24

Power vs. Time Measurement .......................................................................................................... 10-25 P vs T Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 10-25 P vs T Screens .......................................................................................................................... 10-26

Code Domain Power (Demodulator) ................................................................................................. 10-28 CDP Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 10-28 Code Power Screens ................................................................................................................ 10-29

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-2 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

TD-SCDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, or TD-SCDMA,

is a 3G mobile telecommunications standard, being pursued in the

People's Republic of China by the Chinese Academy of

Telecommunications Technology (CATT), and it uses TDD, in contrast to

the FDD scheme used by W-CDMA.

TD-SCDMA offers several unique characteristics for 3G services. In

particular its TDD nature allows TD-SCDMA to master asymmetric

services more efficiently than other 3G standards. Uplink and downlink

resources are flexibly assigned according to traffic needs, and flexible data

rate ranging from 1.2 Kbit/s to 2Mbit/s are provided. This is especially

helpful in an environment with increasing data traffic (mobile data), which

tends to be asymmetric, often requiring little uplink throughput, but

significant bandwidth for downloading information (mobile Internet).

Many radio technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, W-CDMA or cdma2000,

require separate bands for uplink and downlink (paired FDD spectrum). In

this case with asymmetric loads, such as Internet access, portions of the

spectrum are occupied but not used for data transfer. These idle resources

cannot be utilized for any other service, leading to an inefficient use of the

spectrum.

On the contrary, TD-SCDMA adapts the uplink/downlink ratio according to

the data load within a single unpaired frequency, thus utilizing the

spectrum more efficiently. Highly effective technologies like smart

antennas, joint detection and dynamic channel allocation are integral

features of the TD-SCDMA radio standard. They contribute to minimize

intra-cell interference (typical of every CDMA technology) and inter-cell

interference leading to a considerable improvement of the spectrum

efficiency.

Following sub-clause describes the basic frame and resource structure of

TD-SCDMA.

CH

10

10-3 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

FRAME STRUCTURE

There are seven time slots (numbered 0 through 6) in a single 5 ms long

frame, and within each time slot there are up to 16 code channels that are

available to allocate to a single user or to distribute among multiple users.

No Tx-Rx frequency separation is required as Time Division Duplex (TDD)

is employed. Each sub-frame consists of 7 main timeslots where all main

timeslots (at least the first one) before the single switching point are

allocated UpLink (UL) and all main timeslots (at least the last one) after

the single switching point are allocated DownLink (DL). TDD is used to

separate uplink and downlink periods in a given time frame. Therefore, a

Resource Unit (RU) is defined by a frequency, time slot, and code channel

with spreading factor. The basic resource unit uses a spreading factor of

16.

In TD-SCDMA, the nominal channel spacing is 1.6MHz, but this can be

adjusted to optimize performance in a particular deployment scenario.

And the chip rate is 1.28Mcps and each carrier signal occupies 1.6MHz

bandwidth.

Super Frame (720ms)

Frame #0 Frame #1 Frame #71

Radio Frame (10ms)

Sub-Frame #0 Sub-Frame #1

Sub-Frame (5ms)

TS0

Super Frame (720ms)

TS1 TS2 TS3 TS5 TS5 TS6

UpPTS (160chips)

DwPTS (96chips)

GP (96chips)

Switching Point

Sub-Frame (5ms, 6400chips)

Switching Point

(864 x 7 + 96 + 96 + 160 = 6400 chips: 6400 chips ÷ 5ms = 1.28Mchip/s)

Data Symbols352 chips

Midamble144 chips

Data Symbols352 chips

Guard Period16 chips

675usNormal TS Structure

Guard Period 32 chips

SYNC64 chips

75usDwPTS Structure

SYNC1 128 chips

Guard Period32 chips

125usUpPTS Structure

Figure 55 – TD-SCDMA Frame Structure

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-4 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

TIME SLOT

The modulation type can be either QPSK or 8PSK (2 Mbps). For

downlink, the SF (spreading factor) may be 1 or 16. For uplink, the SF

may be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.

Data

For each timeslot, data type depends on the channel selection.

Available data choices for common physical channels include: PN9

and PN15 sequences, user-defined data, and transport channel data.

For multiframe generation, data is continuous across all packets.

For multicarrier generation, data on each channel is independent.

Midamble

The midamble is used as a training sequence for channel estimation,

power measurements, and synchronization. Up to 16 timeslot

midamble codes of length 144 can be generated from a basic

midamble code of length 128. (The basic midamble codes are

repeated to fill the length.) The actual midamble code transmitted

from the midamble field in the time slot depends on the user number

and the total number of users allocated the same basic midamble

sequence. The midamble used by each user has a unique shift from

the basic midamble code, thus providing channel information for

different users by one correlation.

Up to 16 Codes depending on Max. used

Spreading factor

1.6 MHz

Time-frame

5ms

Figure 56 – TD-SCDMA Resource Structure

CH

10

10-5 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

DWPTS

UPPTS

GP

FDD VS. TDD

Downlink Pilot Time Slot, 96 chip duration. DwPTS is used for downlink

synchronization. During the cell search procedure, the UE acquires the

timing of the DwPTS by correlating with the SYNC-DL code transmitted in

the DwPTS. The UE must identify which SYNC-DL sequence is used out

of 32 SYNC-DL possible sequences. Since each SYNC-DL is mapped to

four basic midamble codes (there are 128 basic midamble codes in total),

the UE can identify which basic midamble code is used at the Node-B.

Knowing the basic midamble code also identifies the unique associated

scrambling code.

Uplink Pilot Time Slot, 160 chip duration. UpPTS is used by Node B to

determine the received power level and the received timing from the UE.

In order to reduce interference to traffic channels resulting from the

unsynchronized uplink, the first transmission from the UE at the uplink

direction has to be in the UpPTS. The timing used for the UpPTS

transmission is estimated from the received power level of the DwPTS

and/or P-CCPCH. The Node-B then detects the SYNC-UL (128 codes in

total) transmitted in the UpPTS and issues timing commands to the UE for

adjusting its new transmission time in a resolution of 1/8 chips.

Guard period between DwPTS and UpPTS determines the maximum cell

size. This main guard period is 96 chips long which is different from other

normal guard periods of 16 chips between time slots. The GP insures that

a UE transmitting the UpPTS does not disturb the reception of the DwPTS

for other close-by UEs 96 chip duration.

The key technologies used in TD-SCDMA as followed.

Separate Uplink and Downlink by adopting TDD.

Separate different users by using TDMA and CDMA so it can reduce

the number of users in each timeslot, which reduces the

implementation complexity of multiuser detection and beam-forming

schemes.

Table 60 – FDD and TDD component comparison

FDD Component TDD Component Technology WCDMA TD-SCDMA Bandwidth 2 x 5MHz paired 1 x 1.6MHz unpaired Frequency Reuse 1 1 or 3 Handover Hard, Soft, Softer Hard Modulation Type QPSK QPSK and 8-PSK Chip Rate 3.84 MCPS 1.28 MCPS Spreading Factor 4 ~ 256 1,2,4,8,16 Timeslots/Frame -- 7

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-6 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

USING TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

This section provides details about the TD-SCDMA communications

system and explains how the various measurements are performed by the

instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for TD-SCDMA system.

Channel Power

Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ration (ACLR)

Spurious Emission Mask (SEM)

Occupied Bandwidth

Code Power

Power vs. Time (Frame, Slot and Mask)

Timing Offset

Frequency Error

IQ Origin Offset (Constellation)

Multi-ACLR

OTA

Auto Measure

CH

10

10-7 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in TD-SCDMA Tx

Analyzer mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry

keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the

input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When

the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in

predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the center frequency step units; values can be entered

with the data entry key or the knob. When the data entry keys are used,

the input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value on the

screen key. When the knob is used, the incremental value is 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected

without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom

channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When

the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Amplitude

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the

graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is

selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum

values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-8 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using

spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Step Description

Amplitude

[Ref Level]

<Enter values>

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level]

Knob

Select from front Hard Key

Select from Screen Menu

Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

Select from Screen Menu

Step= 10dB

Table 61 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level

changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the

attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user

(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input

attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be

displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input

attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to

an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the

JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the

measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input

signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again

and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

!

!

CH

10

10-9 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

TRACE/DISPLAY

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable

offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value

reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is

automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An

offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value

set in Analysis Mode.

This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer measurement mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum measurement mode,

a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select

screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press

the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with

View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores

hidden traces and information on the window.

M: Max Hold

m: Min Hold

C: Captured Trace

W: Current Trace

L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned

trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly

acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger

trace on the screen.

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-10 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

BW/AVG

MARKER

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared

traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared

trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one

when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to

delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces

cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace

settings.

AVERAGE: Sets the average number of traces. A maximum of 99 times of

averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum mode, a Marker key

is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be

changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active

markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker

View On is selected.

CH

10

10-11 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-12 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum mode, a Peak Search

key is used as below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of

the trace each time the trace is updated.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum or TD-SCDMA

Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to select measurement menu

listed below.

Channel Power Measurement

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

SEM Measurement

ACLR Measurement

Multi-ACLR Measurement

Demodulator Measurement

OTA Measurement

Auto Measure

CH

10

10-13 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

MEASURE SETUP

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,

and ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to

the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

When the instrument is in Multi-ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is

used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to

the internal frequency burst and DwPTS

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running)

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

LOWEST FREQ: Sets the lowest frequency to be measured.

HIGHEST FREQ: Sets the highest frequency to be measured.

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-14 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

When the instrument is in Multi-ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is

used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to

the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

LOWEST FREQ: Sets the lowest frequency to be measured.

HIGHEST FREQ: Sets the highest frequency to be measured.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key

is used as below.

SCRAMBLE CODE: Sets the method of Scramble code search.

MANUAL: Search manually set by user.

AUTO: Auto Search.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to

the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

CH

10

10-15 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

SPREAD FACTOR: Sets the Spread Factor from Auto, SF1 ~ SF16. User

can designate Spread Factor by selecting SF1 ~ SF16.

MAX USER: Sets the number of users up to 16.

SLOT NUMBER: Sets the Time Slot number to be displayed in the

measurement screen. Slot number can be set from TS0 ~ TS6.

THRESHOLD: Sets the threshold level to get automatic pass/fail indication.

DETECT MODE: Selects the modulation types, Auto, QPSK, 8-PSK and

Peak. When Peak is selected, the instrument determines modulation

type by checking highest power component from QPSK, 8PSK or PEAK.

SCRAMBLE MAP: Sets the types of detecting method to determine

Midamble/Channel estimation either full search or max power search.

MAX: Determine using Max Power.

SPEC: Search based on TD-SCDMA specification.

DC ON/OFF: Turns DC component On or Off to calculate EVM, PCDE, etc.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-16 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale

information

② Input Attenuation Information

[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On

③ Number of Averaging

④ RBW and VBW Setting Information

⑤ Span Setting Information

⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑦ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key

⑧ Channel Power Measurement Key

⑨ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key

⑩ SEM Measurement Key

⑪ ACLE Measurement Key

⑫ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

- P vs T (Slot, Frame, and Mask)

- Code Power

- Midamble Power

- Symbol Data

- Code Error

- Constellation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Figure 57 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display

CH

10

10-17 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

SETUP

Frequency Setup

It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx

Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the

JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Table 62 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss was measured

Mode [Spectrum]

Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

Freq/Chan [Start Freq] [Stop Freq] [Center Freq]

or [Center Freq] [Span]

or [Unit] <Freq/Chan> [Channel Standard] <Select>

Set Frequency Select Chan Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow key

Amplitude [Reference Level] [Scale Division] [Auto Atten]

Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker [Marker Select] [Marker View] [Marker Type] [Marker Table] [Marker Edit] [Marker ] <Marker CF>

<Marker Start> <Marker Stop>

Set Marker Select M1 ~ M6 On/Off Normal/Delta When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table Type frequency to set Marker Set current Marker frequency to center frequency Set current Marker frequency to start frequency Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency

BW/AVG [RBW] [VBW/RBW] [SPAN/VBW]

Set RBW/VBW and Average Select RBW from screen key

1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-18 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

External Clock Setting

Standards

To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A

must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not

supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time

base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,

therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as

signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Table 63 – External Clock Operating Standard

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref

Clock

Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In

(BNC)

Manual switching

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 58 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

CH

10

10-19 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Channel Power Procedure

Table 64 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

The Channel Power measurement determines the average power of an

RF signal burst at or above a specified threshold value. The threshold

value may be absolute, or relative to the peak value of the signal.

The purpose of the Channel Power measurement is to determine the

power delivered to the antenna system on the RF channel under test. The

instrument acquires a TD-SCDMA signal in the time domain. The

average power level above the threshold is then computed and displayed.

Table 65 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[Channel Power]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select Channel Power Measurement

Port Name Signal Characteristics

Even Sec Sync In PP2S

10msec

TTL compatible

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-20 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Channel Power Screen

Figure 59 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH

10

10-21 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure

Occupied bandwidth is a measure of the bandwidth containing 99% of the

total integrated power for transmitted spectrum and is centered on the

assigned channel frequency. The occupied channel bandwidth is about

1.6 MHz based on a chip rate of 1.28Mcps.

Table 66 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[Occupied Bandwidth]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-22 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Occupied Bandwidth Screen

Figure 60 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH

10

10-23 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

SPECTRUM EMISSIONS MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure

SEM Screen

In this measurement, the spurious transmissions (whether modulated or

un-modulated) and the switching transients are specified together by

measuring the peak power in a given bandwidth at various frequencies.

Table 67 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[SEM]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select SEM Measurement

Figure 61 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-24 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

ACLR MEASUREMENT

ACLR Procedure

ACLR Screen

The ACLR (Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio), measures the power

contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the total

carrier power (mean power).

Table 68 – TD-SCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[ACLR]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select ACLR Measurement

Figure 62 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen

CH

10

10-25 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

POWER vs. TIME MEASUREMENT

P vs T Procedure

The Power vs. Time (P vs T) measurement analyzes the amplitude profile

and timing of the burst signal and provides a time mask for the signal. It

measures the mean transmit power during the “useful part” of TD-SCDMA

bursts and verifies that the power ramp fits within the defined mask. TD-

SCDMA is a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) scheme with seven

time slots, or bursts, per RF channel and by using the “Multi-Slot” function,

up to seven slots in a frame can be viewed at one time.

Table 69 – TD-SCDMA P vs T Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[Demodulator]

[P vs T (Slot)] or

[P vs T (Frame)] or

[P vs T (Mask)]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select Demodulators

Select P vs T Slot or Frame or Mask Measurement

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-26 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

P vs T Screens

Figure 63 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen

Figure 64 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen

CH

10

10-27 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

Figure 65 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Mask) Measurement Screen

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-28 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN POWER (DEMODULATOR)

CDP Procedure

TD-SCDMA receivers rely on the frequency or phase quality of the QPSK

or 8-PSK signal in order to achieve the expected carrier to noise

performance. A transmitter with high frequency or phase error is often

still able to support phone calls during a functional test.

This measurement displays the frequency errors numerically and

graphically, showing the binary representation of the demodulated data

bits of the received signal using Code Power, Midamble Power, Symbol

Data, Code Error and Constellation screens.

Table 70 – TD-SCDMA Demodulator Measurement Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA]

[Demodulator]

[Code Power] or

[Midamble Power] or

[Symbol Data] or

[Code Error] or

[Constellation]

Select Tx Analyzer mode

Select TD-SCDMA

Select Demodulators

Select Demodulator Measurements

CH

10

10-29TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

Code Power

Screens

Figure 66 – TD-SCDMA Code Power Measurement Screen

Figure 67 – TD-SCDMA Midamble Power Measurement Screen

CH

10

Chapter 10

10-30 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Figure 68 – TD-SCDMA Symbol Data Measurement Screen

Figure 69 – TD-SCDMA Code Error Measurement Screen

CH

10

10-31 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Chapter 10

Figure 70 – TD-SCDMA Constellation Measurement Screen

CH

11

11-1 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

11.0 CABLE & ANTENNA ANALYZER

In this chapter

Cable and Antenna Analyzer Introduction ....................................................................................................11-2

Standing Wave Ratio ...........................................................................................................................11-3 Practical implications of SWR ..............................................................................................................11-3 Return loss ..........................................................................................................................................11-4 DTF ......................................................................................................................................................11-5 Cable Loss ...........................................................................................................................................11-5

Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer .............................................................................................................11-6 How to Use Keys .........................................................................................................................................11-7

Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................11-7 Amplitude .............................................................................................................................................11-7 Trace/Display .......................................................................................................................................11-8 BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................11-9 Marker .................................................................................................................................................11-9 Peak Search ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10 Measure ............................................................................................................................................. 11-10 Measure Setup .................................................................................................................................. 11-10

VSWR ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-11 VSWR Display ................................................................................................................................... 11-11 Setting Frequency.............................................................................................................................. 11-13 Setting Trace Point ............................................................................................................................ 11-19 Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 11-19 Using Markers.................................................................................................................................... 11-19 Using Limit Line ................................................................................................................................. 11-20 DTF Display ....................................................................................................................................... 11-21

DTF ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-21 DTF Display ....................................................................................................................................... 11-21 DTF Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 11-23 Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 11-28 Using Markers.................................................................................................................................... 11-28 Using Limit Line ................................................................................................................................. 11-30

Cable Loss (One Port Measurement) ........................................................................................................ 11-31 Cable Loss Display ............................................................................................................................ 11-31 Setting Frequency.............................................................................................................................. 11-33 Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 11-37 Using Markers.................................................................................................................................... 11-37 Using Limit Line ................................................................................................................................. 11-37

Gain/Loss (Two Ports Measurement) ........................................................................................................ 11-39 Gain/Loss Display .............................................................................................................................. 11-39 Setting Frequency.............................................................................................................................. 11-41 Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 11-46 Using Markers.................................................................................................................................... 11-46 Using Limit Line ................................................................................................................................. 11-47

CH

11

11-2 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

A large number of abnormal cell site problems are typically caused by the

antenna system, cable and connectors, or both. It’s important to have the

right instrument available when either servicing or certifying cell sites for

operation.

The JD7105A Cable and Antenna Analyzer is a diagnostic tool needed to

accurately detect operational problems. The JD7105A has all of the

measurement functions necessary to accurately verify antenna systems

from Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) to power measurements. In

addition, the JD7105A makes distance-to-fault measurements to

accurately pinpoint the fault’s location.

The Cable and Antenna Analyzer’s key measurements are:

VSWR

Distance to Fault

One Port Loss

Insertion Gain/Loss

To get maximum power into a load it is required that the load impedance

match the generator impedance. Any difference in impedance or

mismatching would not produce maximum power transfer. An impedance

mismatch at the antenna system produces a reflective 'traveling wave'

which goes in the opposite direction from the incident wave. As the two

traveling waves cross each other in opposite direction, it is produce an

interference pattern called a "standing wave". VSWR is the ratio between

the power sent forward to the cable and/or antenna and the amount of

power that is reflected back to the transmitter.

Some of the consequences of having a high VSWR condition in cellular

services are: dropped calls, poor reception, and an overall unacceptable

performance in the cell (or section of cell) covered by the base station

antenna. Therefore, the VSWR of the antenna system including the feed

line is one of the most critical factors in the service and maintenance of

the RF transmitter systems.

CH

11

11-3 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

STANDING WAVE RATIO

PRACTICAL IMPLICATIONS OF SWR

In telecommunications, standing wave ratio (SWR) is the ratio of the

amplitude of a partial standing wave at its maximum amplitude and at its

minimum, in an electrical transmission line.

The SWR is usually defined as a voltage ratio called the VSWR, for

voltage standing wave ratio. For example, the VSWR value 1.2:1 denotes

a maximum standing wave amplitude that is 1.2 times greater than the

minimum standing wave value. It is also possible to define the SWR in

terms of current, resulting in the ISWR, which has the same numerical

relationship. The power standing wave ratio (PSWR) is defined as the

square of the VSWR.

SWR has a number of implications that are directly applicable to RF radios.

SWR is an indicator of reflected waves bouncing back and forth within

the transmission line, and as such, an increase in SWR corresponds

to an increase in power in the line beyond the actual transmitted

power. This increased power will increase RF losses, as increased

voltage increases dielectric losses, and increased current increases

resistive losses.

A transmission line with matched impedances gives an ideal power

transfer; mismatched impedances give high SWR and reduced power

transfer.

Higher power in the transmission line also leaks back into the RF

radio, which may cause the radio to over heat.

The higher voltages associated with a sufficiently high SWR could

damage the transmitter. Solid state radios which have a lower

tolerance for high voltages may automatically reduce its output power

to prevent damage. The high voltages may also cause transmission

line dielectric to break down and/or to burn.

VSWR measurements may be taken to ensure that a waveguide is

contiguous and has no leaks or sharp bends. If such bends or holes

are present in the waveguide surface, they may diminish the

performance of transmitter and receiver equipment strings.

CH

11

11-4 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

PRACTICAL IMPLICATIONS OF SWR (cont’d)

RETURN LOSS

Another cause of bad VSWR in a waveguide is moisture build-up,

which can typically be prevented with silica gel or pressurization of

the waveguide with dry gas.

A very long run of coaxial cable especially at a frequency where the

cable itself is loose can appear to a radio as a matched load. The

power coming back is, in these cases, partially or almost completely

lost in the cable run.

In telecommunications, return loss is a measure of power reflected from

imperfections in an electrical or optical communications link. It is the ratio

(PR / PT), representing the power of the wave reflected from the

imperfection (PR) to that of the incident, or transmitted, wave, (PT). For

maximum transmitted power, the return loss should be as small as

possible, meaning the ratio PR / PT should be as small as possible.

Return loss is usually expressed in dB, the return loss value describes the

reduction in amplitude of the reflected energy, as compared to the forward

energy. It will always be a loss, and therefore a negative dB. However one

can write -3 dB as simply 3 dB of loss, dropping the negative sign and

adding loss. For example, if a device has 15 dB of return loss, the

reflected energy from that device (PR), is always 15 dB lower than the

transmitted energy (PT). When expressed in dB, larger (in magnitude)

negative numbers represent larger return losses and thus smaller

reflected power (PR).

In electrical systems, return losses often occur at junctions between

transmission lines and terminating impedances. It is a measure of the

dissimilarity between impedances in metallic transmission lines and loads.

For devices that are not perfect transmission lines or purely resistive loads,

the return loss value varies with the frequency of the transmitted signal.

CH

11

11-5 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

DTF

CABLE LOSS

While VSWR is an indicator to express the efficiency of the antenna’s

energy transmission, DTF is a measurement to identify the fault locations

in the antenna line system. Most of the antenna line system consists of

various types of coaxial cables, connectors and devices such as dividers

and surge arrestors.

Since VSWR is a measurement to verify the impedance discontinuity of

the total feed line system, it is necessary to perform DTF measurement to

identify the exact component that is contributing to the performance of the

line system. The DTF measurement makes it easy to identify the fault

location by displaying the relative distance of the signal reflections or

discontinuities from various points of the line system.

The cable loss measurement feature checks the signal attenuation level of

the cable system. The frequency band to measure the characteristics of a

cable must be calibrated before performing the cable loss measurement.

CH

11

11-6 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

USING CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

This section provides a basic usage of the keys in the Cable and Antenna

Analyzer and explains how the various measurements are performed by

the instrument.

CH

11

11-7 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

FREQ/CHAN

AMPLITUDE

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in Cable and Antenna

Analyzer mode.

Freq/Chan

Sets the Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum

measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or

the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by

selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the

spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry

keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the

input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When

the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in

predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

BAND LIST: The frequency band is selected without defining the start,

stop, and center frequencies. The saved custom bands window is shown

to select the bands available.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the

instrument will sweep.

Amplitude

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the

minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the

graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is

selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum

values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen.

MAX (TOP): Sets the maximum display range (Y-scale), which is the top of

the measurement screen.

CH

11

11-8 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

TRACE/DISPLAY

MIN (BOTTOM): Sets the minimum display range (Y-scale), which is the

bottom of the measurement screen.

SCALE: Changes Y-scale in VSWR or Return Loss.

LIMIT: Sets the limit to On or Off.

LIMIT LEVEL: Sets the limit level.

Selects the active trace. Each time this key is pressed, a new active trace

is selected.

SELECT: Selects an active trace. Every time Select screen menu is

pressed, the active trace changes. Channel numbers are assigned to each

captured traces or loaded traces. Refer to “Save & Load” for procedures to

load traces.

VIEW: Hides or displays the Trace CH on the screen. Press Select screen

menu key to choose the Trace CH. Traces with View set OFF are hidden

from the screen. The information about the hidden traces is also cleared

from the information window shown on the upper right of the screen.

Setting View On restores hidden traces and information on the window.

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen and assigns a

Trace CH. Refer to “Save & Load” for procedures to save traces.

TRACE INFO: Hides or displays the trace information window on the

upper right corner of the screen. This is used to view traces overlaid with

the trace information window.

CLEAR TRACE: Deletes an active trace channel from the screen. The

cleared channel is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace

channel one by one when multiple channels are displayed on the screen.

Verify the channels to delete with View ON/OFF function in advance

settings as cleared channels cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all channels from the instrument and initialize the

trace settings.

CH

11

11-9 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

BW/AVG

MARKER

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six

Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,

and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y

coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

the description of each measurement after this chapter.

SELECT: Selects an Active Marker whose position is moved by the

pressing Select key. The assigned number of an active marker is

displayed in red color on the Select screen menu and the marker’s

number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In

the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions

when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has

been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:

Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the

reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between

two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,

1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a

Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a

Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes

the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X

and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER TABLE: Displays a table on the left side of the screen when

Marker Table is activated. All X and Y coordinates of the activated

markers are displayed on the table.

CH

11

11-10 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

PEAK SEARCH

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are

redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a

measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window

appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the

marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the

highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its

current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its

current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

When the instrument is in the Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Measurement mode, a Measure key is used to select measurement

menu listed below.

VSWR

DTF

One Port Loss

Gain/Loss

CALIBRATION: Performs calibration using standard O-S-L calibration kit.

The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement result.

For best results, set the frequency and calibrate the instrument

immediately before taking any measurement.

DATA POINTS: Sets the data points or resolution to measure the trace.

The following trace point can be selected: 126, 251, 501, 1001

CH

11

11-11CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

VSWR DISPLAY

VSWR VSWR DISPLAY

The following figure is a screen example when VSWR measurement mode

is selected. Various kinds of information related to the VSWR

measurement are shown on the screen.

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement

frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first

turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is

displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the

calibration is successfully completed.

② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for

the trace [Return Loss (dB), VSWR].

③ Trace Average: Indicates the average value of a single sweep over

the user setting frequency band.

④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a

measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following:

126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice

as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately

twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.

⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency

band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.

Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.

Figure 71 – VSWR Measurement Screen Display

CH

11

11-12 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

⑥ TOP & BOTTOM: Display range setting information.

⑦ Freq Band Info: The band name is displayed if the band is selected

from the band list stored in the instrument. If the user sets the start,

stop, center or span frequencies manually, the band name will show

“CUSTOM”.

Selecting trace points larger than needed for the measurement

will result in longer sweep times. It is recommended to select

high resolution trace points only when measuring wide

frequency bands or a precise measurement is required. The calibration is

effective even after the trace points are changed.

CH

11

11-13 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SETTING FREQUENCY

Frequencies can be set manually or selected from a band list stored in the

instrument. It is desirable to set the frequency to a value that covers the

normal range of the measurement with enough margins.

Table 71 – Frequency Setting Procedure

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key. Hard key

2. Select the Center screen menu. The popup to enter frequency is displayed.

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/ Stop Frequency

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key. The current setting is cleared when a new

value is entered.

Press the ESC key to delete one by one the

numbers displayed on the pop-up window.

Pressing the ESC key repeatedly will cancel

the input mode.

The frequency input unit is in MHz and the

minimum input steps is 0.01MHz

2. Select the Start screen menu

3. Enter a start frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Stop screen menu.

6. Enter a stop frequency value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Selection from the band list stored in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

Press the Up/Down arrow keys or rotate the

dial knob to select a band from the list.

Select the Page Up/Down screen menu for

searching bands not shown in the screen.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the list and press the

Enter key

CH

11

11-14 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Changing the frequency settings will automatically turn

calibration OFF with the indication “CAL OFF” displayed on the

screen. Always set the frequency before calibrating the instrument.

Changing the trace points during the measurement doesn’t affect the

calibration.

CH

11

11-15CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement result.

For best results, set the frequency and calibrate the instrument

immediately before taking any measurement.

Calibration accessories (optional).

Calibration Kit, which contains a 50 ohm load, one open standard and

one short standard.

Test cable: Use a phase stable cable for reliable and consistent

measurement results.

To minimize measurement errors, connect the port extension

cable to the RF Out port on the instrument and then connect the

Calibration Kit to the end of the extension cable.

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Standard Calibration Kit

O

S

L

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

Figure 72 – Calibration for VSWR measurement

CH

11

11-16 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Bending or moving the phase unstable cable while making a

measurement may cause errors in the measurement. The test

cable used for port extension must be phase stable in the measurement

frequencies.

At the successful completion of each calibration step, a message

is displayed with a beep sound.

The above figure illustrates the connection method when a port extension

cable is used for calibration. To compensate errors caused by a port

extension cable or adapters, perform an Open-Short-Load calibration

including the port extension cable.

Standard Calibration Kit

O

S

L

Extension Cable

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

Figure 73 – Calibration using extension cable

CH

11

11-17 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Table 72 – Calibration Procedure

Action Note

Performs Calibration after the frequency setting and test cable connections.

1. Call up the Measure Setup key

2. Press the Calibration key.

Hard function key

Screen menu key

3. Connect an Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the test cable.

4. Select the Open screen menu

When the Open screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

5. Connect a Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the test cable.

6. Select the Short screen menu

When the Short screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

7. Connect the 50ohm load Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the test cable.

8. Select the Load screen menu

When the Load screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after the Open-Short-Load calibration.

CH

11

11-18 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

MAKING VSWR MEASUREMENT

The instrument is ready to make VSWR measurements after completing

the Open-Short-Load calibration using a port extension cable.

The end of the port extension cable must be connected to the device

(antenna or feed line) for VSWR measurements as shown in the following

figure. The result of the VSWR measurement is displayed on the screen in

real time.

Figure 74 – Connection for VSWR Measurement

CH

11

11-19 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

!

SETTING TRACE POINT

SCALE ADJUSTMENT

USING MARKERS

After calibration, do not change the connection of the port

extension cable or the frequency setting. It may cause a

measurement error.

When the frequency setting is changed, a warning alarm will

sound and the calibration state will change to “CAL OFF”. In

this case, recalibrate the instrument using the Open-Short-Load standard.

The maximum allowable input level of the instrument is +25dBm.

Do not connect the RF Out port of the instrument directly to the

output port of the system. An over power input degrades the performance

of the instrument and may cause a malfunction of the instrument.

Do not connect the instrument to the antenna when there is a

risk of lightning. Electric shock may cause a malfunction or

damage the instrument.

Adjust a trace point to change the resolution of the VSWR measurement.

Changing the Trace Point doesn’t affect the calibration state.

Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on

the Y-scale manually.

Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the

entire trace.

Press the SCALE key to select the display unit of the Y-scale.

Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the calibration state.

Depending on the measurement setting, four or six markers can be used

simultaneously. The Y-axis value on a current trace is displayed next to

each marker on the screen, but the frequency information is not provided.

CH

11

11-20 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

USING LIMIT LINE

By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a

specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm

sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is

displayed in red color.

Figure 75 – Using Markers in VSWR Measurement Mode

Figure 76 – Limit Line Application

CH

11

11-21CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

DTF DISPLAY

DTF DTF Display

The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when DTF

measurement mode is selected. The distance from the instrument is

shown in the X-axis, while the relative magnitude of the discontinuity is

shown in the Y-axis. The information related to the DTF measurement is

shown on the screen.

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement

frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first

turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is

displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the

calibration is successfully completed.

② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for

the trace [Return Loss (dB), VSWR].

③ MAX Distance: Displays the maximum measurable distance within

the user setting frequency band. Setting a narrow frequency band

will increase the measurable distance while setting a wide frequency

band will decrease the distance.

④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a

measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following:

126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice

as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately

twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.

Figure 77 – DTF Measurement Screen Display

CH

11

11-22 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency

band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.

Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.

⑥ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the

screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a

Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and

Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”. The

following information is also displayed.

Rel. Propagation Velocity: The relative propagation velocity for

the cable type selected by the user from the Cable List or

manually set by selecting the Velocity key.

Nominal Attenuation: The loss per unit distance for the cable

type that the user selected from the Cable List or set manually by

selecting the Cable Loss key.

⑦ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.

CH

11

11-23 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

DTF SETUP

Sets the conditions for DTF measurements. The user setting parameters

for DTF measurements are the following:

Frequency Setting: Sets the start and stop frequencies to make a

measurement. If a specific frequency band has been set in VSWR

measurement mode, it can be applied to DTF measurement. To

change the maximum measurement distance or increase the

measurement resolution, is necessary to change the frequency

setting.

Distance Setting: The maximum measurable distance is displayed

on the left side of the screen depending on the frequency setting. Any

value within the maximum measurable distance can be set. Optimum

resolution is achieved when the user setting distance is the same as

the maximum measurable distance.

Cable Setting: Selects a cable type of the feed line. By using this key,

users can select the cable stored in the instrument without setting the

detailed parameters of the cable.

Setup: Used to change the setting of the cable parameters or change

the distance unit. It consists of the following sub menus:

Velocity: Sets the relative propagation delay of a cable. It

affects the calculation of the distance in the DTF

measurement.

Cable Loss: Sets the loss per distance unit of a cable. It

affects the peak level of the discontinuity in the DTF

measurement.

After calibration, do not change the connection of the port

extension cable or the frequency setting. It can cause a

measurement error. When the frequency setting is changed, a

warning alarm will sound and the calibration state will change to “CAL

OFF”. After changing the frequency setting, recalibrate the instrument

using the Open-Short-Load standard.

CH

11

11-24 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

A detailed procedure for DTF setup is as follows:

Table 73 – DTF Setup Procedure

Action Note

Frequency Setting

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key

Select the Start Freq screen menu

- Enter start frequency value

- Press the ENTER key

Select the Stop Freq screen menu

- Enter stop frequency value

- Press the ENTER key

Additional calibration is not necessary if

a Freq. Band has been set and a

calibration has been performed for the

band in VSWR measurement, and the

same Freq. band is used in the DTF

measurement.

Distance Setting

2. Call up the Measure Setup key

3. Select the Distance screen menu

Enter measuring distance

Press the ENTER key

The ending point can only be set in

distance setting.

The maximum measurable distance is

1,250m (4,125ft).

Cable Setting

4. Select the Cable List screen menu

[Standard]/[Custom]

- Select a cable by using Knob or

arrow key

Press the ENTER key

Setup

5. Setting Relative Propagation Velocity

Select the Velocity screen menu

Enter user setting value

Press the ENTER key

6. Setting Cable Loss

Select the Cable Loss screen menu

Enter user setting value

Press the ENTER key

7. Setting the X axis Unit

[Meter]/[Feet]

CH

11

11-25CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement results.

The instrument must be calibrated to get the DTF measurement results

compatible with VSWR measurement results.

Calibration accessories (optional)

Calibration Kit which contains one 50 ohm load, one Open standard

and one Short standard

Test cable: Use a phase stable cable for reliable and consistent

measurement results

To minimize measurement errors, connect the port extension

cable to the RF Out port on the instrument and then connect the

Cal Kit to the end of the extension cable.

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Standard Calibration Kit

O

S

L

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

Figure 78 – Calibration for DTF measurement

CH

11

11-26 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

The figure above shows the connection diagram for calibration using a test

cable. To compensate measurement errors due to the test cable or

adapters, perform the Open-Short-Load (O-S-L) calibration including the

test cable. For detailed calibration procedure, refer to the Calibration

Procedure.

Bending or moving the phase unstable cable while making a

measurement may cause errors in the measurement. The test

cable used for port extension must be phase stable in the measurement

frequencies.

At the successful completion of each calibration step, a

message is displayed with a beep sound.

Following is the calibration procedure for DTF measurement.

Table 74 – Calibration Procedure

Action Note

Performs Calibration after the frequency setting and test cable connections.

1. Call up the Measure Setup key

2. Press the Calibration key.

Hard function key

Screen menu key

3. Connect an Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the test cable.

4. Select the Open screen menu

When the Open screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

5. Connect a Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the test cable.

6. Select the Short screen menu

When the Short screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

7. Connect the 50ohm load Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the test cable.

8. Select the Load screen menu

When the Load screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after the Open-Short-Load calibration.

CH

11

11-27CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

MAKING DTF MEASUREMENT

If a port extension cable is used to interconnect the instrument with the

transmission line, a measurement error can happen due to the sum of the

port extension cable length. By performing the O-S-L calibration at the end

of the port extension cable, the extension cable length will be

compensated and the fault location will be more accurately measured.

The maximum allowable input level of the instrument is +25dBm.

Do not connect the RF Out port directly to the system output port.

Exposure to the overpowered input may degrade the

performance of the instrument and may cause damage in the long run.

Do not connect the instrument to the antenna when there is a

risk of lightning. Electric shock may cause the malfunction or

breakdown of the instrument.

Figure 79 – Connection Diagram for DTF Measurement

!

CH

11

11-28 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SCALE ADJUSTMENT

USING MARKERS

If O-S-L calibration has been done at the end of the port

extension cable for DTF measurement, the length of the port

extension cable is compensated automatically and is not included in the

distance to the point of discontinuity.

Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on

the Y-scale manually.

Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the

entire trace.

Press the SCALE key to select the display unit of the Y-scale.

Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the calibration state.

Depending on the display settings, four or six markers can be used

simultaneously. The distance of a current marker position is displayed next

to each marker on the screen. Activate the marker table to see both the

magnitude and distance information.

Figure 80 – Using Markers in DTF Measurement Mode

CH

11

11-29 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Figure 81 – DTF Measurement in VSWR scale

Figure 82 – DTF Measurement in Return Loss scale

CH

11

11-30 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

USING LIMIT LINE

By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a

specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm

sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is

displayed in red color.

Figure 83 – Using Limit Line in DTF Measurement

CH

11

11-31CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

CABLE LOSS

DISPLAY

CABLE LOSS (ONE PORT MEASUREMENT) Cable Loss Display

The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when Cable Loss

measurement mode is selected. The frequency range is shown on the X-

axis, while the power loss is shown on the Y-axis.

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement

frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first

turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is

displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the

calibration is successfully completed.

② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for

the trace [Cable Loss (dB)].

③ Trace Average: Indicates the average value of a single sweep over

the user setting frequency band.

④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a

measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following:

126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice

as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately

twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.

Figure 84 – Cable Loss Measurement Screen Display

CH

11

11-32 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency

band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.

Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.

⑥ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.

⑦ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the

screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a

Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and

Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”.

CH

11

11-33 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SETTING FREQUENCY

The user must set the frequency band to make a Cable Loss

measurement. Frequencies can be set manually or chosen from a band

list registered in the instrument.

Table 75 – Frequency Setting Procedure

Changing the frequency settings will automatically turn

calibration OFF with the symbol “CAL OFF” to be displayed on

the screen along with an alarm sound. In this case, recalibrate the

instrument with the Open-Short-Load Calibration kit.

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN screen menu. Multi Key

2. Select the Center screen menu. Current setting is displayed as default on the screen

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/Stop Frequency

8. Press the FREQ/CHAN key. Current setting is cleared when a new value is

entered.

Press the ESC key to delete a number displayed on

the pop-up window one by one

Pressing the ESC repeatedly will cancel the input

mode

Input unit is MHz and minimum input step is 0.01MHz

9. Select the Start screen menu

10. Enter a start frequency value.

11. Press the ENTER key.

12. Select the Stop screen menu

13. Enter a stop frequency value.

14. Press the ENTER key.

Selection from the band list registered in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

Press Up/Down arrow key or rotate the knob to select a

band from the list

Select the Page Up/Page Down screen menu for

searching the band that doesn’t show up on the current

page.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the and then press the

Enter key

CH

11

11-34 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get reliable Cable Loss

measurement result. For best results, set the frequencies and calibrate the

instrument immediately before taking measurements.

Calibration accessories (optional).

Calibration kit which contains one 50 ohm load, one Open standard,

and one Short standard

To minimize measurement errors in Cable Loss measurement, do not use

unnecessary extension cables or adapters while performing calibration.

The following figure illustrates the recommended calibration method for

Cable Loss measurement.

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Standard Calibration Kit

O

S

L

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

Figure 85 – Port Calibration for One Port Cable Loss Measurement

CH

11

11-35 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Following is the calibration procedure for Cable Loss measurement.

Table 76 – Port Calibration Procedure for Cable Loss Measurement

Action Note

1. Call up the Measure Setup key

2. Press the Calibration key.

Hard function key

Screen menu key

3. Connect Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the RF Out

port

4. Select the Open screen menu

When the Open screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

5. Connect Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the RF Out

port.

6. Select the Short screen menu

When the Short screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

7. Connect 50ohm Load standard Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the RF

Out/Out port

8. Select the Load screen menu

When the Load screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.

The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after Open-Short-Load calibration.

CH

11

11-36 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

MAKING CABLE LOSS MEASUREMENT

The instrument is ready to perform Cable Loss measurement after

completing the Open-Short-Load calibration.

Table 77 – Cable Loss Measurement Procedure

Step #2Connect “Short”Standard

Step #1Calibration

Cable Under Test

O

S

LO

S L

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

Figure 86 – One Port Cable Loss Measurement Connection Diagram

Action Note

Make a measurement after completion of O-S-L calibration.

1. Connect the cable to measure its loss to the

RF Out port of the instrument.

2. Connect the Short standard of the Cal Kit to

the end of the cable to be tested

Cable Loss measurement result is displayed on the

screen.

CH

11

11-37 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SCALE ADJUSTMENT

USING MARKERS

USING LIMIT LINE

Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on

the Y-scale manually.

Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the

entire trace.

Press the TOP/BOTTOM key to set the display min/max of the Y-

scale.

Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the normalization state.

On the measurement display, six markers can be used simultaneously.

The level of a current trace is displayed next to each marker on the screen,

but the frequency information is not provided. The frequency information

will be provided when Marker Table is enabled (Marker Table On).

By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a

specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm

sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is

displayed in red color.

Figure 87 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH

11

11-38 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Figure 88 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH

11

11-39CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

GAIN/LOSS

DISPLAY

GAIN/LOSS (TWO PORTS MEASUREMENT)

Gain/Loss Display

The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when Cable Loss

measurement mode is selected. The frequency range is shown on the X-

axis, while the power loss is shown on the Y-axis.

① Normalization Info: Displays a calibration state on the

measurement frequency band that a user has selected. When the

instrument is first turned on, the state is “NORM OFF”. The symbol

“NORM ON” is displayed along with the execution time and

frequency band after the normalization is successfully completed.

② Y Scale Unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for

the trace either [Loss (dB)] or [Gain (dB)].

③ Data Points: Sets the number of data points to take during a

measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are 126 and 251,

selecting 251 data points provides twice as many measurement

points as 126, but it takes approximately twice as long for the trace

to sweep and display.

④ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency

band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.

Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.

⑤ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.

Figure 89 – Gain/Loss Measurement Screen Display

CH

11

11-40 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

⑥ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the

screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a

Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and

Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”.

CH

11

11-41 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SETTING FREQUENCY

The user must set the frequency band to make a Gain/ Loss measurement.

Frequencies can be set manually or chosen from a band list registered in

the instrument.

Table 78 – Frequency Setting Procedure

Changing the frequency settings or Gain/Loss measurement will

automatically turn normalization OFF with the symbol “NORM

OFF” to be displayed on the screen along with an alarm sound. In this

case, recalibrate the instrument with the test cable.

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN screen menu. Multi Key

2. Select the Center screen menu. Current setting is displayed as default on the screen

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/Stop Frequency

8. Press the FREQ/CHAN key. Current setting is cleared when a new value is

entered.

Press the ESC key to delete a number displayed on

the pop-up window one by one

Pressing the ESC repeatedly will cancel the input

mode

Input unit is MHz and minimum input step is 0.01MHz

9. Select the Start screen menu

10. Enter a start frequency value.

11. Press the ENTER key.

12. Select the Stop screen menu

13. Enter a stop frequency value.

14. Press the ENTER key.

Selection from the band list registered in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

Press Up/Down arrow key or rotate the knob to select a

band from the list

Select the Page Up/Page Down screen menu for

searching the band that doesn’t show up on the current

page.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the and then press the

Enter key

CH

11

11-42 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

NORMALIZATION

The instrument must be calibrated (normalized) to get reliable Gain/Loss

measurement results. For best results, set the frequencies and normalize

the instrument immediately before taking measurements.

Normalization requires a test Test cable which will be connected

between DUT and the instrument.

To minimize measurement errors in Gain/Loss measurement, do not use

unnecessary extension cables or adapters while performing normalization.

The following figure illustrates the recommended calibration method for

Cable Loss measurement.

Figure 90 – Two Ports Calibration for Gain/Loss Measurement

CH

11

11-43 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

Following is the normalization procedure for Gain/Loss measurement.

Table 79 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement

Action Note

1) Call up the Measure Setup key

2) Press the Calibration key.

Hard function key

Screen menu key

3) Connect the Test Cable between RF In and

RF Out port, then press Enter

Connect Test Cable and Press Enter.

When the Enter is pressed, a progress bar is

displayed to show the progress.

The message, “NORM CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

Normalization state is changed to “NORM ON” after normalizing.

CH

11

11-44 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

MAKING GAIN/LOSS MEASUREMENT

The instrument is now ready to perform Gain/Loss measurement after

completing the normalization.

The following is two port gain/loss measurement procedures.

Table 80 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement

Normalized Test CableDUT

ESC

Freq/Chan Trace/

Display Marker Measure

AmplitudeBW/AVG Peak

SearchMeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

RF In RF Out

Figure 91 – Two Ports Gain/Loss Measurement Diagram

Action Note

1) Call up the Gain/Loss menu.

2) Set up the frequency, Freq/Chan.

3) Press the Measure Setup key and select

Gain or Loss.

4) Perform normalizing.

5) Measure Gain/Loss

Screen menu key

Hard key

Hard key

Screen menu

Screen menu

CH

11

11-45CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

For Gain measurement, +30dB Attenuator required the RF Out

port to protect the instrument from the excessive RF power.

The maximum allowable input of RF In port is +30dBm.

Figure 92 – Two Ports Gain Measurement w/+30dB Attenuator

CH

11

11-46 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

SCALE ADJUSTMENT

USING MARKERS

Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on

the Y-scale manually.

Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the

entire trace.

Press the TOP/BOTTOM key to set the display min/max of the Y-

scale.

Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the normalization state.

On the measurement display, six markers can be used simultaneously.

The level of a current trace is displayed next to each marker on the screen,

but the frequency information is not provided. The frequency information

will be provided when Marker Table is enabled (Marker Table On).

Figure 93 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH

11

11-47 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Chapter 11

USING LIMIT LINE

By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a

specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm

sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is

displayed in red color.

Figure 94 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

12-1 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

12.0 POWER METER

In this chapter

Power Meter Introduction............................................................................................................................ 12-2 Using RF Power Meter ............................................................................................................................... 12-3 How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12-4

Freq/Chan ........................................................................................................................................... 12-4 Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 12-5 Cable Connection ............................................................................................................................... 12-6 Connecting Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 12-7 Measurement Procedure (internal) ..................................................................................................... 12-9

Making Power Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 12-9 Measurement Procedure (using external power sensors) ................................................................ 12-10 Measurement Results ........................................................................................................................ 12-11

12-2 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

POWER METER INTRODUCTION

The RF power measurement function of the JD7105A measures a wider

frequency range (up to 30MHz) compared to the Channel Power

Measurement. Its main application is the output measurement of an

integrated repeater.

The RF power meter of the JD7105A does not adopt conventional power

measurement techniques used on separate Power Sensors. Rather it

uses the band power measurement style based on spectrum

measurement results. Like general spectrum analyzer, measurement

accuracy may be degraded if the span is set too wide, since it limits the

display points within the measurement band. To prevent this, the JD7105A

measures RMS power from the raw data received from FFT in the defined

span, which results in an accurate power measurement independent of the

span setting, even without using a separate power sensor.

Also the JD7105A provides a logging function for measured power on the

screen to track variations. This function provides an accurate estimation of

BTS in operation where the output may continuously fluctuate.

12-3 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

USING RF POWER METER

The Power Meter measures the transmission power of the system. For

radio output power measurements it is required the use of optional

external power sensors. Two kinds of power sensors are available,

directional and terminating; their application depends on the type of power

measurement to be performed, in-service (directional) or out-of-service

(terminating).

12-4 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

FREQ/CHAN

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section describes the use of the keys in Power Meter mode. All

hard keys except Measure, Save, Load, System, Mode will be deactivated.

Menus for setting required parameters will be provided in Screen menu.

The following describes how to use screen menu keys in Cable and

Antenna Analyzer mode.

Freq/Chan

FREQUENCY: Sets the Frequency to be measured. Values can be

entered with the Data Entry key

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency.

SPAN: Sets the frequency range over which the instrument will

sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency.

12-5POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Start/Stop Frequency Information

② Display Range (Min/Max) Setting Information

③ High/Low Limit Indication Setting Information

④ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information

⑤ Measurement Result Display Screen (dBm and Watt)

⑥ Power Min/Max Value Display Screen

⑦ Display Mode Information (Absolute or Relative)

⑧ Pass/Fail Indicator

Figure 95 – Power Meter Screen

12-6 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

CABLE

CONNECTION

(Using Internal Power

Sensor)

RF In

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION

+30dBm MAXAVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA or

LPA

Attenuator

Figure 96 – Connection Diagram (Direct Connection)

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA

or LPA

! CAUTION

+30dBm MAXAVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Figure 97 – Connection Diagram (Indirect Connection)

12-7 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

CONNECTING SENSOR (Using Optional Power

Sensor)

Measuring transmission power of the system can be done either directly

from the instrument or with optional external power sensors. There are two

kinds of power sensors, directional or terminating power sensors, their

application depend on the type of transmission power signal to be

measured.

Table 81 – Types of Power Sensors

Part No Description Frequency Range Power Range

JD731A Directional Power Sensor 300 ~ 3800MHz

Average: +21.76 ~ +51.76dBm

(0.15 ~ 150W)

Peak: +36.02 ~ +56.02dBm

(4 ~ 400W)

JD732A Terminating Power Sensor 20 ~ 3800MHz

Average: -30 ~ +20dBm

(1uW ~ 100mW)

JD733A Directional Power Sensor 150 ~ 3500MHz +24dBm ~ 43dBm (0.25W ~ 20W)

JD724A-

50551

Average Power Sensor

(Terminating type)

20 ~ 3000MHz 0 ~ -30dBm

JD724A-

50552

Peak Power Sensor

(Terminating type)

20 ~ 4000MHz 0 ~ -40dBm

From BTS USB

JD73

2A

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

Figure 98 – Power Sensor Connection (Terminating Type)

12-8 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

After the power sensor connection and initialization, connect the power

sensor to the output port to be measured.

Figure 99 – Power Sensor Connection (Directional Type)

12-9 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

Measurement Procedure (internal)

MAKING POWER MEASUREMENT

The following procedure is for the case using internal power meter, without

external power sensors.

Table 82 – Power Measurement Procedure w/ Internal Power Meter

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

N-N Cable

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

BTSHPA

or LPA

Attenuator

GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

RF In! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

Sync RefDC 15~19VLANUSBSerial GPS

RF Out

E1/T1

! CAUTION+25dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

External In

To Antenna

DirectionalCoupler

EQP-50 dB

-50 dB

OUT IN BTSHPA or

LPA

! CAUTION+30dBm MAX

AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

[Mode]

[Power Meter] / Internal

Selects Power Meter Mode

Selects Internal Power Measurement

[Measure Setup]

[Frequency]

Center Freq

Span]

Start Freq

Stop Freq

Sets Frequency to be measured

Sets Center Frequency

Sets Span

Sets Start Frequency

Sets Stop Frequency

[Display Setup]

[Display] Abs/Rel

[Set Ref]

[Display Max]

[Display Min]

[External Offset]

[Limit Setup] On/Off

[Low Limit]

[High Limit]

[Reset]

Measurement Display Setting

Display method setting

Set current value as reference

Display range

Display range

External offset

Measurement Setting

High/Low Limit Setting

Reset the power meter measurement

12-10 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

Measurement

Procedure (using

external power

sensors)

When you use external power sensors, JD731A, JD732A, JD733A, then

you need to initialize power sensors before measurement. The following

procedure describes the procedure.

Table 83 – RF Power Measurement Using External Power Sensor

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

[Mode]

[Power Meter] / external

Selects Power Meter Mode

Selects External Power Sensor Measurement

[Measure Setup]

[Initialize]

[Frequency]

Center Freq

Span]

Start Freq

Stop Freq

Sets Frequency to be measured

Initialize the power sensor, when initializing

completed, the sensor model number on the top of

the screen.

Sets Center Frequency

Sets Span

Sets Start Frequency

Sets Stop Frequency

[Display Setup]

[Display] Abs/Rel

[Set Ref]

[Display Max]

[Display Min]

[External Offset]

[Limit Setup] On/Off

[Low Limit]

[High Limit]

[Reset]

[Mode] Avg/Peak/VSWR

Measurement Display Setting

Display method setting

Set current value as reference

Display range

Display range

External offset

Measurement Setting

High/Low Limit Setting

Reset the power meter measurement

Power sensor measurement type, this menu only

valid for directional power sensor is connected

12-11 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

Measurement Results

Besides the advantage of measuring and understanding the trends of the

system output in operation where output power constantly varies based on

the amount of calls being processed by the BTS or Repeater, the

advantage of the Log graph is to easily examine the discontinuance of

output power caused by the transmission problems or defective

connection.

Figure 100 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Abs)

12-12 POWER METER

Chapter 12

CH

12

Figure 101 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Rel)

13-1 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

13.0 E1 ANALYZER

In this chapter

E1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13-2

E1 Standard ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3 G.703/G.704 Framing .......................................................................................................................... 13-3 E1 Frame Structure............................................................................................................................. 13-4 E1 vs. T1............................................................................................................................................. 13-4 E1 Pulse ............................................................................................................................................. 13-5 E1 Physicals ....................................................................................................................................... 13-6 Framing .............................................................................................................................................. 13-7 Line Code ........................................................................................................................................... 13-7 CRC-4 Error Detection ........................................................................................................................ 13-8 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 13-9

Using E1 Analyzer ..................................................................................................................................... 13-11 How to Use Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 13-12

Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 13-12 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 13-12 Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 13-14

Measurement Setup ................................................................................................................................. 13-15 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................................................... 13-16 Terminate Mode ................................................................................................................................ 13-17 Bridge Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 13-17 Monitor Mode .................................................................................................................................... 13-17 Loop Test .......................................................................................................................................... 13-17

13-2

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

E1 INTRODUCTION

The European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications

Administrations (CEPT) originally standardized the E-carrier system, which

revised and improved the earlier American T-carrier technology, and this

has now been adopted by the International Telecommunication Union

Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T).

The E-carrier standards form part of the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

(PDH) where groups of E1 circuits may be bundled onto higher capacity

links between telephone exchanges or countries. This allows a network

operator to provide a private end-to-end E1 circuit between customers in

different countries that share single high capacity links in between.

Physically E1 is transmitted as 32 timeslots, but one is used for framing

and typically one allocated for signaling call setup and tear down. Unlike

Internet data services, E-carrier systems permanently allocate capacity for

a voice call for its entire duration. This ensures high call quality because

the transmission arrives with the same short delay (Latency) and capacity

at all times.

13-3 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

E1 STANDARD

G.703/G.704 FRAMING

The International CCITT framing format is adopted by most countries

(Europe, Central/South America, etc.). These facilities operate at 2.048

MBPS.

G.704: Synchronous Frame Structure

Used and Primary and Secondary

Hierarchical Levels

G.732: Characteristics of Primary PCM

Multiplex Equipment Operating at

2048 KBPS.

An E1 link operates over two separate sets of wires, usually twisted pair

cable. A nominal 2.4 Volt signal is encoded with pulses using a method

that avoids long periods without polarity changes. The line data rate is

2.048Mbit/s (full duplex, i.e. 2.048Mbit/s downstream and 2.048Mbit/s

upstream) which is split into 32 timeslots, each being allocated 8 bits in

turn. Thus each timeslot sends and receives an 8-bit sample 8000 times

per second (8x8000x32 = 2,048,000). This is ideal for voice telephone

calls where the voice is sampled into an 8 bit number at that data rate and

reconstructed at the other end.

One timeslot (TS1) is reserved for framing purposes, and alternately

transmits a fixed pattern. This allows the receiver to lock onto the start of

each frame and match up each channel in turn. The standards allow for a

full Cyclic Redundancy Check to be performed across all bits transmitted

in each frame, to detect if the circuit is losing bits (information), but this is

not always used.

One timeslot (TS16) is often reserved for signaling purposes, to control

call setup and teardown according to one of several standard

telecommunications protocols. This includes Channel Associated

Signaling (CAS) where a set of bits is used to replicate opening and

closing the circuit (as if picking up the telephone receiver and pulsing

digits on a rotary phone), or using tone signaling which is passed through

on the voice circuits themselves. More recent systems used Common

Channel Signaling (CCS) such as ISDN or Signaling System 7 (SS7)

which send short encoded messages with more information about the call

including caller ID, type of transmission required etc.

13-4

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

E1 FRAME STRUCTURE

E1 VS. T1

Unlike the earlier T-carrier systems developed in North America, all 8 bits

of each timeslot are available for each call. This allows the E1 systems to

be used for circuit switch data calls, without the risk of losing information.

While the original CEPT standard G.703 specifies several options for the

physical transmission, almost exclusively the HDB3 format is used.

32 Timeslots in Total

Each channel holds 8 Bits

Each channel repeats 64,000 times a second (64 Kbps)

30 Timeslots for voice calls

Two Special Timeslots

TS0: Framing and Synchronization

TS16: Signaling

Table 84 – E1 vs. T1

0

TS1 ~ TS15, 15 Channels

1 2 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31

TS17 ~ TS31, 15 Channels

TS16, SignalingTS0, Synchronization

Time Slots

Figure 102 – E1 Frame Structure

US Standard International Standard

T1 E1

Trunk Speed 1.544 MBPS 2.048 MBPS

DS-1 Framing D4 193 bits G.704 256 bits

Line Coding Alternate Mark Inversion G.703 HDB3

Number of DS 0 24 30

Signaling In-band or Robbed bit Out-band

US Standard International Standard

T1 E1

Trunk Speed 1.544 MBPS 2.048 MBPS

DS-1 Framing D4 193 bits G.704 256 bits

Line Coding Alternate Mark Inversion G.703 HDB3

Number of DS 0 24 30

Signaling In-band or Robbed bit Out-band

13-5 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

E1 PULSE

The quality of the E1 pulse is an important factor for clear transmission.

The ITU-T G.703 standard defines the max and min values in the form

of a mask. A good E1 pulse must fit inside this mask.

A G.703-compliant pulse-shaped 2 Mbit/s signal, when transported via

metallic cable of correct impedance and prescribed length, will not distort

beyond the design limits of the receive ports of the network elements.

Otherwise, the resultant errors will lead to degraded service to customers

and unnecessary repair costs for service providers.

The pulse shape can provide an excellent qualitative indication of both

noise and jitter. Averaging tends to smooth the noise riding on the signal. If

jitter is present, the rising and falling edges will be seen as scattered along

the time axis. Digital measurement of the pulse width, rise and fall times,

and over/undershoot values will give additional information on the possible

sources of distortion.

269ns(244+25)

194ns(244-50)

Nominal pulse

244ns

219ns(244-25)

488ns(244+244)

10%

10% 20

%20

%

V=100%

V=50%

V=0%

10%

10%

20%

10%10%

Figure 103 – Mask of the Pulse at 2.048 Mbps Interface

13-6

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

E1 PHYSICALS

Also See Table below for the specifications for an E1 pulse, as

specified in ITU-T G.703.

Table 85 – ITU-T G.703 2.048 Mbps Pulse Mask Specifications

The 2.048 Mbit/s stream is the basic building block for the transmission of

signals in the PCM digital hierarchy. Proper inter-networking of equipment

along that signal path requires strict compliance with various standards

such as ITU-T G.703, and G.704.

Output signals from such network elements as multiplexers, regenerators,

switches and PBX must be within the defined limits. The input circuitry of

the network elements must be able to compensate for any attenuation or

distortion caused by the transmission media. Then the logic 1s and 0s will

be detected correctly; otherwise, bit/code errors will result.

There are two types of physical delivery in E1.

Unbalanced 120Ω

Copper delivery on 4 wires

One pair for Rx (1+2), and one pair for Tx (4+5)

Balanced 75Ω

Coax with BNC connectors

One cable for Rx, and one cable for Tx

13-7 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

FRAMING

LINE CODE

Framing is necessary so any equipment receiving the E1 signal can

synchronize, identify, and extract the individual channels.

2M transmission utilizes two main types of framing:

Frame Alignment Signal (FAS)

Multi-Frame Alignment Signal (MFAS)

PCM-30 transmission systems use MFAS framing along with FAS

framing

In PCM-30 timeslots 1 through 15 correspond to channels 1

through 15, and timeslots 17 through 31 correspond to channels

16 through 30.

Timeslot 16 is used for the multi-frame alignment and Channel

Associated Signaling (CAS)

PCM-31 transmission systems use only FAS framing

In PCM-31 framing, timeslots 1 through 31 correspond to

channels 1 through 31.

Fractional E1 is not offered with unframed signals, because framing is

required to determine the location of timeslots.

Two types of line coding are used in a typical E1 2.048 Mbit/s network:

AMI and HDB3.

AMI line coding (Alternate Mark Inversion)

AMI is used to represent successive 1s’ values in a bitstream with

alternating positive and negative pulses to eliminate any DC offset. AMI is

not used in most 2.048 Mbit/s transmission because synchronization loss

may occur during long strings of zeros as there are no pulses.

HDB3 line coding (High Density Bipolar 3)

High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) line coding is used for transmission of 2

Mbps for two key reasons:

The HDB3 coded signal is DC-free. Therefore, the signal can be

transmitted through balanced transformers’ coupled circuits.

The clock recovery circuits of the receivers can operate well, even

though the data contains long strings of zeros.

13-8

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

CRC-4 ERROR DETECTION

No more than three consecutive zeroes are permitted. The AMI (Alternate

Mark Inversion) rule is violated intentionally whenever 4 or more zeros are

encountered. The 4 zeros are substituted in one of the two ways

described and illustrated below. Which method is used is governed by the

polarity of the last inserted violation pulse (V) and whether the number of

pulses between the previous violation pulse and the next one is odd or

even.

If there is an odd number of pulses between the last violation pulse V

and the next V to be inserted, the 0000 is substituted with 000V. The

polarity of the inserted V bit is the same as that of the pulse

immediately preceding it. The polarity of this V is opposite to that of

the previous V.

If there is an even number of pulses between the last violation V and

the next V, the 0000 is substituted with B00V. B (Bipolar pulse) is

inserted in the place of the first zero and its polarity is opposite to that

of the pulse immediately preceding it. The polarity of the inserted V is

the same as that of B and opposite to that of the previous V.

The CRC-4 function specified in ITU-T Rec. G.704 allows evaluating the

quality of transmission over E1 links. When the CRC-4 option is enabled,

frames are arbitrarily grouped in groups of 16 (these groups are called

CRC-4 multi-frames).

A CRC-4 multi-frame always starts with a frame that carries the frame

alignment signal. The CRC-4 multi-frame structure is identified by a six-bit

CRC-4 multi-frame alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of

AMI

HDB3

VPrevious V

Figure 104 – AMI & HDB3 Line Coding

13-9 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

ALARMS

timeslot 0 of each odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multi-

frame, up to frame 11 of the multi-frame. Each CRC-4 multi-frame is

divided into two sub-multiframes of 8 frames (2048 bits) each.

The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit checksum on

each 2048-bit block (sub-multiframe). The four checksum bits calculated

on a given sub-multiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of timeslot 0

of each even-numbered frame of the next sub-multiframe.

At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each sub-

multiframe and then compared against the original checksum (sent by the

transmitting end in the next sub-multiframe). The results are reported by

two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4

multiframe, respectively. Errors are counted and used to prepare statistic

data on transmission performance.

E1 Signal LOS (Loss Of Signal)

The E1 Signal Loss alarm is defined as the absence of “marks” in the

incoming data – poor or no received signal level. When the E1 Signal LOS

is active, Frame Sync and Pattern Sync alarms may also be active. The

LOS condition occurs when no pulses have been detected on the line for

between 100 to 250 bit times. This is the highest state alarm where

nothing is detected on the line. The LOS may occur when a cable is not

plugged in or the far end equipment, which is the source of the signal, is

out of service.

Frame Sync

The Frame Sync alarm is declared when the LFA condition, also called an

out-of-frame (OOF) condition occur when there are errors in the incoming

framing pattern. The number of bit errors that provokes the condition

depends on the framing format.

Pattern Sync

The Loss of Pattern Sync alarm is specific to BER test equipment, and it

may only be observed on test equipment when performing out-of-service

testing. Pattern sync losses occur under conditions of significant bit errors,

and may be caused by poor received signal level due to faulty network

elements, or by one side bad of the connection pair, or line frequency

13-10

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

HDB3 (High Density Bipolar 3)

A HDB3 pulse pattern was detected on the incoming signal at the receive

port. Note that only certain patterns transmit HDB3 pulse patterns. The

pattern must contain at least 4 consecutive zeroes before a HDB3 pattern

is sent.

FAS RAI (Frame Alignment Signal)

Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This

condition is declared when too many errors are reported in the frame

alignment signal (FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the

last 5 frames. Loss of frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are

detected in two consecutive frames.

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is used to maintain

line signal synchronization in case of loss of input signal, e.g., because an

alarm condition occurred in the equipment that supply the line signal. Note

that the equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame synchronization.

CRC Error

A Cyclic Redundancy Check-4 (CRC-4) is often used in 2M transmission

to identify possible bit errors during in-service error monitoring.

CRC-4 is a checksum calculation which allows for the detection of

errors within the 2.048Mbit/s signal while it is in service. A discrepancy

indicates at least one bit error in the received signal.

CRC-4 error checking provides a most convenient method of identifying bit

errors within an in-service system, but provides only an approximate

measure of the circuit's true performance.

13-11 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

USING E1 ANALYZER

A portable test instrument, JD7105A, can be a useful tool to check the

overall health of the transmission system, and assist in locating the source

of problems or defects. At the physical layer, the parameters of interest are

bit rate (and its stability), jitter, wander, level, noise, code errors and pulse

shape distortion. A key test in this area is to verify that the signal pulse

shape conforms to the ITU-T G.703 recommendation.

13-12

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

HOW TO USE KEYS

In this section describes hard key usages in E1 Analyzer measurement.

Keys are not listed in here will not be used.

Measure

MEASURE OFF: Activates E1 Analyzer Measurement mode or return to

main menu of E1/T1 Analyzer.

BERT: Sets the measurement parameters of BER testing.

EVENT LOG: Enable or disable event logging functionality of E1 Analyzer.

Measure Setup

RX INPUT: Selects the receive inputs.

Terminate: The transmitter sends data according to the

transmitter settings in the Measure Setup menu, including

framing, line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a

nominal 120ohm input impedance.

Bridge: Bridge mode provides greater than 1kohms input

impedance for in-service monitoring, bridging the receiver input

across lines that are terminated elsewhere in the network.

Monitor: The monitor mode is designed for in-service monitoring

of E1 lines. In monitor mode, the instrument is set for 120ohms

nominal input impedance.

FRAMING: Selects the types of framing. If the Framing type of received

signal is not accord with receiver setting, then Framing alarm occurs.

PCM-30: In PCM-30 timeslots 1 through 15 correspond to

channels 1 through 15, and timeslots 17 through 31 correspond

to channels 16 through 30. Timeslot 16 is used for the multi-

frame alignment and Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)

PCM-31: In PCM-31 framing, timeslots 1 through 31 correspond

to channels 1 through 31.

LINE CODE: Selects the types of line codes to send E1 signal.

AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion, A line code uses a three level

signals to convey binary digits in which successive binary ones

(“marks” or pulses) are of alternating polarity, either positive or

negative, equal in amplitude. A binary zero (“space”) is

transmitted as no pulse, or zero amplitude.

HDB3: High Density Bipolar Order 3 Encoding. It is a bipolar

13-13 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

signaling technique (using both positive and negative pulses) based on

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI). Extends AMI by inserting violation codes

whenever there is a run of 4 or more zeros.

PATTERN: Selects the types of patterns.

Off: No patterns are sent.

1-4: A four-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test

clock recovery.

1-8: An eight-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test

clock recovery.

All 1's: A pattern that causes line drivers to consume the

maximum power.

All 0's: A pattern that is often selected to verify HDB3

provisioning. Circuit will drop if optioned for AMI.

Alternate: A pattern that alternates between ones and zeroes.

CRC-4: Activate and Deactivate CRC-4. A method used to detect errors in

blocks of data transmitted across communication links. The detection is

determined by a formula applied at both the transmit and receive ends. E1

uses a 4 bit CRC (CRC-4) for error checking.

TX CLOCK: Selects the clock source to measure frequency and timing.

Int: Internal clock uses an internal oscillator, in case of external

reference is not available, the instrument does not transmit signal

to synchronized equipment, the instrument provides the clock to

the unit under test and most cases in Loopback test mode.

Rx: Transmit clock uses the frequency recovered from the

received signal (Network Loop), if accurate frequency

measurement is needed.

TX LBO (Transmit Line Build Out): Selects the line build out level.

Possible values for LBO are 0 dB, -6 dB.

13-14

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Rx Mode: Current test modes setting information, Terminate, Bridge

and Monitor

② Framing: Framing modes setting information, PCM-30 and PCM-31

③ Line Code: Two different line coding formats are used in T1 networks,

AMI and B8ZS

④ Tx Clock: Tx Clock setting information, Internal and Rx

⑤ Tx Pattern: Selected Tx Patter information

Off, 1-8, 1-16, All 1’s, All 0’s, Alternate, 3-24, QRSS, 2e23, 2e15,

2e23 INV, 2e15 INV

⑥ Tx LBO: Line Build Out level setting information, 0dB, -7.5dB, and

-15dB

⑦ Loop Mode: Current loop modes information, CSU and NIU

⑧ Measure On/Off: Measure on/off selection menu

⑨ BERT: Bit Error Rate Testing setting menu, user can set the following

setups

Tx Signal, Error Set, Error Injection, Alarm on/off (AIS, RAI Alarm),

and Clear History

⑩ Event Log On/Off: Activate and Deactivate Event logging capability

Figure 105 – E1 Analyzer Screen

13-15 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

Measurement Setup

The following is the basic settings and procedure for T1 analysis.

Table 86 – E1 Analysis Procedure

Menu Description

Mode

[Mode]

E1/T1 E1

Select E1 Analyzer Mode

BERT setup

BERT

TX Signal/On/Off

Error Set/1E-5/1E-6/1E-7 or 1

Clear History

Set up BERT testing parameters

Select BERT

Tx signal on/off

Sets the Error injection

Clear previous alarm history

Measure Setup

[Measure Setup]

RX Input

Terminate/Bridge/Monitor/Loop

Framing

PCM-30/PCM-31

Line Code

AMI/HDB3

Pattern

Off/1-4/1-8/All 1’s/All 0’s and Alternate

CRC-4

Off/On

TX Clock

Int/Rx

TX LBO

0dB/-7.5dB/-15dB

Measurement Setting

Select Measure Setup

Select Rx Input mode

Select Framing type

Select Line Code

Select Stress Pattern

Set CRC-4

Select the timing source

Select the Tx Line Build Out Level

13-16

Chapter 13

E1 ANALYZER

CH

13

Connection Diagram

Figure 106 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis

Out-of-service Testing

Point-to-point

Loop back

GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ESC

+/-

. Del

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0Enter

Freq/

Chan

Trace/Display

Marker

MeasureAm

plitude

BW/AVG

Peak Search

MeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

NE

Tx

RxNE

Error Injection & Measurement

GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ESC

+/-

. Del

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0Enter

Freq/

Chan

Trace/Display

Marker

MeasureAm

plitude

BW/AVG

Peak Search

MeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

NE

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

Error Injection

Error Measurement

In-service Monitoring

13-17 E1 ANALYZER

Chapter 13

CH

13

Terminate Mode

Bridge Mode

Monitor Mode

Loop Test

The Terminate mode is used when you wish to send and receive an E1

signal. The instrument terminates the received signal with a low

impedance termination, and requires that the circuit be disrupted for

testing.

The Bridge mode is similar to the Monitor mode. However, in the Bridge

mode, the instrument applies high impedance isolation resistors to the

circuit under test. This isolation circuitry will protect the signal from any

possible disruption. There is no need to plug into the TX jack of the test

set while in the BRIDGE mode, and there is no need to specify a test

pattern to be transmitted. However, the transmitter in the test set is

sending the selected test pattern, framing, coding, and CRC.

The Monitor (protected monitoring point) mode is used when a monitor

access is to be made. The network element has isolated the MON signal

from the live signal with high impedance resistors.

The Monitor mode is useful because it protects the live signal from any

possible disruptions caused by the testing process. It allows the technician

to observe the line while the customer is actually using it and to see if

there are any problems.

The Loop mode is used to terminate a signal and loop it through the

instrument. The incoming Rx signal is terminated, regenerated, and

retransmitted through the Tx connector. Code violations and frame errors

are eliminated in this loopback. This mode is similar to the Terminate

mode, but the instrument loops the signal internally instead of transmitting

the selected test pattern. There are two main applications for the Loop test,

used to loop a signal back to the direction which it came from. This is

normally done if the circuit is out of service. In the other application, one

direction of a live circuit is passed through the instrument in the Loop

mode.

14-1 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

14.0 T1 ANALYZER

In this chapter

T1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 14-2

T1 Bandwidth ...................................................................................................................................... 14-3 T1 Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 14-3 Line Code ........................................................................................................................................... 14-4 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 14-6 Physical Interface ............................................................................................................................... 14-8

Using T1 Analyzer....................................................................................................................................... 14-9 How to Use Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 14-10

Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 14-10 Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 14-10 Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 14-13

Measurement Setup ................................................................................................................................. 14-14 Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................................. 14-15 Terminate Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 14-16 Bridge Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 14-16 Monitor Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 14-16 Loop Test .................................................................................................................................................. 14-16

14-2 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

T1 INTRODUCTION

The T1 is what telephone companies have traditionally used to transport

digitized telephone conversations between central offices. As early as the

1960’s, a single T1 circuit made it possible for a telephone company to

deliver 24 high quality voice conversations. Since a T1 is a fully digital

service, there was no possibility of crosstalk, which is common in analog

carrier networks where copper pairs pickup emissions from neighboring

pairs. Significant increases in noise immunity were also achieved by

adopting this new digital transmission standard.

Since the early 1980’s, T1 service has been available to private industry

throughout the country. This document will discuss the various types of T1

measurement items, how to measure them, and understand the general

guidelines of T1 analysis using the JD7105A, Base Station Analyzer.

14-3 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

T1 BANDWIDTH

T1 FRAMING

The bandwidth of a T1 is commonly known to be 1.544Mbps. This

represents the maximum bit carrying ability of a T1. The overhead

necessary to frame a T1 is 8kbps. Therefore, the total usable bandwidth is

1.536Mbps, or the equivalent of 24 DS-0 channels. A single DS-0 has a

bandwidth of 64kbps and is designed to carry a digitized telephone call.

Today, T1 technology is being used in private and public networks to carry

both voice and data traffic.

A T1 is framed to provide 24 logical 64kbps channels (channels are

referred to as a DS-0). Each channel is designed to carry a single digitized

telephone call. Since telephone calls are digitized at a rate of 64kbps, we

can send a call over a single DS-0. Therefore, a T1 provides 24 X 64kbps

in usable bandwidth. This equates to 1.536Mbps. The total bandwidth of a

T1 is actually 1.544Mbps, which includes 8kbps in overhead.

T1 framing is necessary to provide a common data format and to provide

a means for synchronization on a network. There are three common

framing standards currently in use. D4 framing (Super Frame, SF) is the

principal framing method that was initially used with T1 networks. D4

describes a frame made up of 24 one byte samples from each of the 24

DS-0s (192 bits). A single framing bit is sent in front of every 192 bit

structure ([24 X 8] + 1 = 193 bits per frame).

Extended Super Frame (ESF) is a newer framing method used on T1s. It

uses fewer framing bits than D4 and provides a means for gathering

performance data from the T1.

8Kbps Overhead

DS-0 #1 64Kbps

.

.

.

.

DS-0 #24 64Kbps

1.536Mbps1.544Mbps

*) 24 64Kbps DS-0 Channels provide 1.536Mbps in usable bandwidth**) Total bandwidth = 1.536Mbps + 8Kbps (Overhead) = 1.544Mbps

Figure 107 – T1 Bandwidth

14-4 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

LINE CODE

SLC-96 is a framing format introduced by AT&T and later standardized by

Bellcore in TR-TSY-000008, Digital Interface between the SLC 96 Digital

Loop Carrier System and a Local Digital Switch. The framing is used on

AT&T's old SLC-96 product line. The framing supports a broad variety of

maintenance functions such as alarm transmission, automatic switching to

protection line, and far end loop back. SLC-96 framing is used on the DS1

link in between the central office terminal and the remote terminal.

Two line codes are supported for T1 transmissions; Alternate Mark

Inversion (AMI) and Binary 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). Although line code

is not directly associated with T1 framing, the following is generally true:

SF D4 usually uses AMI line coding

ESF usually uses B8ZS line coding

AMI line coding

When used on a T-carrier, the code is known as Alternate Mark Inversion

because, in this context, a binary 1 is referred to as a "mark", while a

binary 0 is called a "space". The coding was used extensively in first-

generation PCM networks, and is still commonly seen on older

multiplexing equipment today, but successful transmission relies on no

long runs of zeroes being present. No more than 15 consecutive zeros

should ever be sent to ensure synchronization. The modification of bit 7

causes a change to voice that is undetectable by the human ear, but it is

an unacceptable corruption of a data stream. Data channels are required

to use some other form of pulse-stuffing, such as always setting bit 8 to 1,

in order to maintain one's density. Of course, this lowers the effective data

throughput to 56kbit/s per channel.

Framing Bit 192 Bits (24 x 1Byte) Framing Bit 192 Bits (24 x 1Byte)

12 consecutive frames create a single D4 Super

Frame (SF)

Frame 1 Frame 2

Figure 108 – D4 Frame Format

14-5 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

B8ZS line coding

B8ZS is an abbreviation for Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution (or Binary

Eight Zero Substitution)- which is a method of line coding used in the T-

carrier system which allows full 64kbits per second per channel.

On a T1, ones are sent by applying voltage to the wire, where a zero is

sent by having no voltage on the wire. Sending excessive zeros in a row

could cause receiving equipment to lose synchronization, so it is important

that such a pattern not be sent.

The original standard of line coding, AMI Alternate Mark Inversion,

specifies that there are three states of the line, no voltage is a zero,

positive voltage is a one (or mark), and negative voltage is also a one (or

mark). Because of the inversion of the voltage for each "mark," or one,

sent, the receiving equipment can easily determine the data rate of the

line and not lose synchronization.

For the B8ZS scheme, any time eight consecutive zeros are detected in

the data stream to be transmitted, the transmitter "substitutes" a fixed

pattern of ones, zeros, and BPVs in place of those 8 zeros. This is a very

specific pattern; each block of eight consecutive zeros is replaced with

000VB0VB, where B represents and inserted "1" bit, and V represents an

inserted "1" that is a bipolar violation.

Figure 109 – AMI Encoding

Table 87 – B8ZS Encoding

14-6 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

ALARMS

The terminating receivers can recognize this pattern and re-substitute the

original string of 8 zeros back in place of the fixed pattern.

T1 Signal LOS (Loss Of Signal)

The T1 Signal Loss alarm is defined as the absence of “marks” in the

incoming data – poor or no received signal level. When the T1 Signal LOS

is active, Frame Sync and Pattern Sync alarms may also be active.

Frame Sync

The Frame Sync alarm is declared when more than 2 out of 5 FT bits are

found in error for D4 (SF) Framing, or 2 out of 5 FPS bits in ESF framing

format are found to be in error. For D4 framing, the Frame Loss alarm is

cleared after detection of two consecutive complete framing sequences.

Likewise for ESF framing, the Frame Loss alarm is cleared after detection

of two consecutive FPS bit sequences. Frame loss can be caused by a

number of problems including bad connections, poor signal level,

noise/interference on the line, or line frequency offsets (T1 line frequency

that deviates from the nominal 1,544,000Hz bit frequency).

Pattern Sync

The Loss of Pattern Sync alarm is specific to BER test equipment, and it

may only be observed on test equipment when performing out-of-service

testing. Pattern sync losses occur under conditions of significant bit errors,

and may be caused by poor received signal level due to faulty network

elements, or by one side bad of the connection pair, or line frequency

offsets that may be caused by poor clock recovery.

Data 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

Tx Data 1 1 0 0 0 V B 0 V B 0 1 0 1 1

Substituted sequences

AMI with B8ZS

Encoding

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th

Figure 110 – B8ZS Encoded Signal

14-7 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

B8ZS

Bipolar with 8-zero Substitution. A coding scheme in which the transmitter

“substitutes” a fixed pattern of ones, zeros, and BPVs in place of 8

consecutive zeros. This is a very specific pattern, each block of eight

consecutive zeros is replaced with 000VB0VB, where B represents and

inserted “1” bit, and V represents an inserted “1” that is a bipolar violation.

Red Alarm

Red alarm indicates the alarming equipment is unable to recover the

framing reliably. Corruption or loss of the signal will produce “red alarm.”

Connectivity has been lost toward the alarming equipment.

RAI

Remote Alarm Indication. A signal transmitted from terminal equipment in

the outgoing direction when it determines that it has lost the incoming

signal, or when it receives an AIS signal in the incoming direction. RAI is

also called the Yellow Alarm.

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

The AIS is also known as a "Keep Alive" or "Blue Alarm" signal. Blue alarm

indicates a disruption in the communication path between the terminal

equipment. Communication devices, such as repeaters and multiplexers

must see and produce line activity at the DS1 rate. If no signal is received

that fills those requirements, the communications device produces a

series of pulses on its output side to maintain the required activity. Those

pulses represent data “1” in all data and all framing time slots. This signal

maintains communication integrity while providing no framing to the

terminal equipment. The receiving equipment displays a “red alarm” and

sends the signal for “yellow alarm” to the far end because it has no

framing, but at maintenance interfaces the equipment will report “AIS” or

Alarm Indication Signal. AIS is also called “all ones” because of the data

and framing pattern.

14-8 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

PHYSICAL INTERFACE

Yellow Alarm

Yellow alarm indicates reception from the far end of a data or framing

pattern that reports the far end is in “red alarm”. Red alarm and yellow

alarm states cannot exist simultaneously on a single piece of equipment

because the “yellow alarm” pattern must be received within a framed

signal.

For ESF framed signals, all bits of the Data Link channel within the

framing are set to data “0”; the customer data is undisturbed. For SF D4

framed signals, the pattern sent to indicate to the far end that inbound

framing has been lost is a coercion of the framed data so that bit 2 of each

timeslot is set to data “0” for three consecutive frames.

BPV (Bipolar Violation)

In a bipolar signal, a one (mark or pulse) that has the same polarity as the

previous one (mark or pulse).

A T1 is physically made up of two balanced pairs of copper wire

(commonly known as twisted pair). The pairs are used in a full duplex

configuration where one pair transmits information and the other pair

receives information. Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) typically

terminates a T1 with a RJ-48C jack. The following illustration shows a

typical T1 cable and interface.

Figure 111 – Typical T1 Cabling

14-9 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

USING T1 ANALYZER

The JDSU JD7105A provides a simple solution for all your T1 testing

needs, from basic transmission testing to BERT (Bit Error Rate Test)

testing.

The following sections provide basics performing a T1 Analyzer

Measurement.

14-10 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

MEASURE

MEASURE SETUP

HOW TO USE KEYS

In this section describes hard key usages in T1 Analyzer measurement.

Keys are not listed in here will not be used.

MEASURE MEASURE OFF: Activates T1 Analyzer Measurement mode or return to

main menu of E1/T1 Analyzer.

BERT: Sets the measurement parameters of BER testing.

LOOP TEST: Sets the measurement parameters of LOOP TEST.

Remote Loop Up: Activates external loop back, the instrument

sends request the loop back mode to the system.

Remote Loop Dn: Deactivates external loop back, the

instrument sends request the clear of loop back mode to the

system.

Self Loop Up: Activates internal loop back.

Self Loop Dn: Deactivates internal loop back, reverting the

instrument to a through mode.

EVENT LOG: Enables or disables event logging functionality of T1

Analyzer.

RX SIGNAL (VPP) OFF/ON: Enables or Disables Vpp.

MEASURE SETUP RX INPUT: Selects the receive inputs.

Terminate: The transmitter sends data according to the

transmitter settings in the Measure Setup menu, including

framing, line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a

nominal 100ohm input impedance.

Bridge: Bridge mode provides greater than 1kohms input

impedance for in-service monitoring, bridging the receiver input

across lines that are terminated elsewhere in the network.

Monitor: The monitor mode is designed for in-service monitoring

of T1 lines. In monitor mode, the instrument is set for 100ohms

nominal input impedance.

14-11 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

FRAMING: Selects the types of framing. If the Framing type of received

signal is not accord with receiver setting, then Framing alarm occurs.

SF-D4 (Super Frame-D4): Group of 12 Frames, used to align

equipment for framing.

ESF (Extended Super Frame): Group of 24 Frames, used to

align equipment for framing, Uses 4K for a maintenance channel

(Facilities Data Link), 2K for CRC-6 checksum and 2K for

framing/synchronization.

LINE CODE: Selects the types of line codes to send T1 signal.

AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion, A line code uses a three level

signals to convey binary digits in which successive binary ones

(“marks” or pulses) are of alternating polarity, either positive or

negative, equal in amplitude. A binary zero (“space”) is

transmitted as no pulse, or zero amplitude.

B8ZS: Bipolar with 8-zero Substitution. A coding scheme in which

the transmitter "substitutes" a fixed pattern of ones, zeros, and

BPVs in place of 8 consecutive zeros.

PATTERN: Selects the types of patterns.

Off: No patterns are sent.

1-8: An eight-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test

clock recovery.

1-16: A sixteen-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test

clock recovery.

All 1's: A pattern that causes line drivers to consume the

maximum power.

All 0's: A pattern that is often selected to verify B8ZS

provisioning. Circuit will drop if optioned for AMI.

Alternate: A pattern that alternates between ones and zeroes.

3-24: A twenty-four bit-pattern containing 3 ones with the longest

length of consecutive zeroes constrained to fifteen. It has ones

density of 12.5% and is used to check clock recovery.

QRSS: A pseudorandom pattern that simulates live traffic on a

circuit. It is a very common test pattern

2e23: A pseudorandom pattern based on a 23 bit shift register.

2e15: A pseudorandom pattern based on a 15 bit shift register.

2e23 INV: Bit inversed pseudorandom pattern based on a 23 bit

shift register.

14-12 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

2e15 INV: Bit inversed pseudorandom pattern based on a 15 bit

shift register.

TX CLOCK: Selects the clock source to measure frequency and timing.

Int: Internal clock uses an internal oscillator, in case of external

reference is not available, the instrument does not transmit signal

to synchronized equipment, the instrument provides the clock to

the unit under test and most cases in Loopback test mode.

Rx: Transmit clock uses the frequency recovered from the

received signal (Network Loop), if accurate frequency

measurement is needed.

TX LBO (Transmit Line Build Out): Selects the line build out level.

Possible values for LBO are 0 dB, -7.5 dB, or -15 dB.

(0dB) is used for these cases.

- Test set is connected to the DSX front panel, to CSU, to NIU

or Channel Bank.

- Cabling less than about 130ft in-between test set and DSX.

- In most cases.

(-7.5, -15dB) are used for the below cases,

- Attenuation is needed where the T1 line is series connected

to 7.5dB, 15dB attenuator.

LOOP CODES

LINK: Select between In-Band and Data-Link. Use Data-Link

when framing is ESF.

Inband

Datalink

CSU: Select CSU (Channel Service Unit) codes.

NIU: Select NIU (Network Interface Unit) codes.

14-13T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

DISPLAY

OVERVIEW

① Rx Mode: Current test modes setting information, Terminate, Bridge

and Monitor

② Framing: Framing modes setting information, SF-D4 and ESF

③ Line Code: Two different line coding formats are used in T1

networks, AMI and B8ZS

④ Tx Clock: Tx Clock setting information, Internal and Rx

⑤ Tx Pattern: Selected Tx Patter information

⑥ Off, 1-8, 1-16, All 1’s, All 0’s, Alternate, 3-24, QRSS, 2e23, 2e15,

2e23 INV, 2e15 INV

⑦ Tx LBO: Line Build Out level setting information, 0dB, -7.5dB, and

-15dB

⑧ Loop Mode: Current loop modes information, CSU and NIU

⑨ Loop Link: Inband and Datalink

⑩ Measure On/Off: Measure on/off selection menu

⑪ BERT: Bit Error Rate Testing setting menu, user can set the

following setups

⑫ Tx Signal, Error Set, Error Injection, Alarm on/off (AIS, RAI Alarm),

and Clear History

⑬ Loop Test: Remote Loop Up/Down, Self Loop Up/Down

⑭ Event Log On/Off: Activate and Deactivate Event logging capability

Figure 112 – T1 Analyzer Screen

14-14 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

Measurement Setup

The following is the basic settings and procedure for T1 analysis.

Table 88 – T1 Analysis Procedure

Menu Description

Mode

[Mode]

E1/T1 T1

Select T1 Analyzer Mode

BERT setup

BERT

TX Signal/On/Off

Error Set/1E-3/1E-4/1E-5/1

AIS Alarm]/On/Off

RAI Alarm]/On/Off

Clear History

Set up BERT testing parameters

Select BERT

Tx signal on/off

Sets the Error injection

Set AIS alarm

Set RAI alarm

Clear previous alarm history

Loop Test setup

Loop Test

Remote Loop Up/Remote Loop Dn/

Self Loop Up/Self Loop Dn

Select Loop Test

Measure Setup

[Measure Setup]

RX Input

Terminate/Bridge/Monitor

Framing

SF-D4/ESF

Line Code

AMI/B8ZS

Pattern

Off/1-8/1-16/All 1’s/All 0’s/Alternate/

3-24/QRSS/2e23/2e15/2e23 INV/

2e15 INV

TX Clock

Int/Rx

TX LBO

0dB/-7.5dB/-15dB

Loop Codes

Link/CSU/NIU

Measurement Setting

Select Measure Setup

Select Rx Input mode

Select Framing type

Select Line Code

Select Stress Pattern

Select the timing source

Select the Tx Line Build Out Level

Select Loop Codes

14-15T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

Connection Diagram

Figure 113 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis

Out-of-service Testing

Point-to-point

Loop back

GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ESC

+/-

. Del

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0Enter

Freq/

Chan

Trace/Display

Marker

MeasureAm

plitude

BW/AVG

Peak Search

MeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

NE

Tx

RxNE

Error Injection & Measurement

GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ESC

+/-

. Del

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0Enter

Freq/

Chan

Trace/Display

Marker

MeasureAm

plitude

BW/AVG

Peak Search

MeasureSetup

Save

Load

System

Mode

NE

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

Error Injection

Error Measurement

In-service Monitoring

14-16 T1 ANALYZER

Chapter 14

CH

14

Terminate Mode

Bridge Mode

Monitor Mode

Loop Test

It is out-of-service testing (removing live traffic from the T1 circuit before

testing begins), and is used for analyzing received T1 signal. The

transmitter sends data according to the Tx Clock setting, including framing,

line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a nominal 100

ohm input impedance.

It is in-service monitoring test and bridging the receiver input across lines

that are terminated in the network without interrupting the signal.

In-service test, transmitter will activate to send test patterns.

Loopback mode is intended for out-of-service testing of T1 lines. In this

mode, the instrument performs a “line loopback” of the data from the

receiver to the transmitter.

15-1 APPENDIX

Appendix

APP

END

IX

15.0 APPENDIX

In this chapter

APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... 15-2 APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................................ 15-4 APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST .............................................................................................................................. 15-5 APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD ................................................................................... 15-7 APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE ................................................................................. 15-8 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................... 15-9

APPEN

DIX

15-2

Specification

SPECIFICATION

APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION Standard Gain/Loss Measurement Frequency Accuracy ±0.05ppm Internal Frequency Range 25MHz ~ 3GHz Frequency Aging ±0.5ppm/year Frequency Resolution 100KHz Display 8.4' TFT LCD (800 x 600 mode) Output Power Level -30dBm or 0dBm (nominal) Frequency and time reference

Dynamic Range -80 ~ 60dB Even Second TTL 10MHz,13MHz,15MHz -10 ~ + 10dBm Channel Scanner Spectrum Analyzer Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz Input Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy Maximum Input Level +30dBm (1W) Measurement Range -110 ~ 20dBm Amplitude Accuracy ±1.0dB Channel Power Accuracy ±1.0dB Resolution Bandwidth 10Hz ~ 3MHz (1-3 sequence) CDMA TX Analyzer Video Bandwidth 1Hz ~ 3MHz (1-3 sequence)

Frequency Range 410MHz ~ 495MHz, 805MHz ~ 940MHz

Dynamic Range > 85dB 1750MHz ~ 2170MHz Input Attenuation 0~55dB (step 5dB) Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy

SSB Phase Noise -95dBc @30KHz offset Waveform Quality (ρ) ±0.005 for 0.9 < ρ < 1

-105dBc @100KHz offset Pilot Time Alignment (Tau) ± 0.5μs

DANL

Typical -140dBm Code Domain Power

±0.5 dB relative power @100Hz RBW with Preamp On ±1.5 dB absolute power

Frequency Typical Max Pilot Power ±1.0dB 10MHz ~ 1GHz -140dBm -142dBm Channel Power ±1.0dB 1GHz ~ 2GHz -138dBm -140dBm EVDO TX Analyzer 2GHz ~ 3GHz -138dBm -138dBm

Frequency Range 410MHz ~ 495MHz, 805MHz ~ 940MHz

Measurement Range DANL ~ +30dBm 1750MHz ~ 2170MHz RF In VSWR < 1.5 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy Power Meter Waveform Quality (ρ) ±0.005 for 0.9 < ρ < 1 Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz Pilot Time Alignment (Tau) ± 0.5μs Display ±100dBm (user settable)

Code Domain Power ±0.5 dB relative power

Measurement Range -70dBm ~ +30dBm ±1.5 dB absolute power Offset Range 0 ~ 60dBm Pilot Power ±1.0dB

Accuracy -40dBm ≤ Power ≤ +30dBm ±1.0dB Channel Power ±1.0dB -70dBm ≤ Power < -40dBm ±1.5dB WCDMA/HSDPA TX Analyzer

VSWR < 1.5 Frequency Range 869MHz ~ 894MHz, 1710MHz ~ 2170MHz Maximum Power +30dBm(1W) without external attenuator Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy Cable and Antenna Analyzer EVM Accuracy ±2.0 % for 2% < EVM < 20% Max input power (RF Out) +25dBm, ±50VDC Residual EVM 3.0% typical Frequency Range 25MHz ~ 4GHz

Code Domain Power ±0.5% for code channel power >-27dB

Frequency Resolution 100KHz 16,32,64 DCPH (Test Mode 1) Data Points 126, 251, 501, 1001 16,32 DCPH (Test Mode 2, 3) Measurement Speed 1,1.3, 2.5, 5sec for each data point CPICH Accuracy ±1.0dBm One port Power 0dBm (nominal) Channel Power ±0.7dB (Typical) Corrected Directivity 40dB (typical) Occupied Bandwidth ±100KHz

1 Port Accuracy ≤ ±(0.8 +|20 log (1+10-EP/20)|) dB (typical) Residual ACLR < -58dB @5MHz, < -60dB @10MHz

EP=Directivity-Measured Return Loss ACLR Accuracy ±0.7dB

Immunity to Interference On Frequency : +5dBm GSM/GPRS/EDGE TX Analyzer

On Channel : +17dBm On Channel : +17dBm

450MHz ~ 500MHz, 820 ~ 965MHz VSWR 1705MHz ~ 1995MHz Range 1 ~ 65 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy Resolution 0.01 GSMK Modulation Quality

RMS Phase ±0.5deg

Return Loss Range 0 ~ 60dB Residual Error (GSMK) 0.5deg Resolution 0.01 8PSK Modulation

Quality EVM ±1.5%

DTF

Vertical Range VSWR:1 ~ 65 Residual Error (8PSK) 2.50%

Return Loss: 0 ~ 60dB Burst Power ±1.0dB Vertical Resolution 0.01 GSM Channel Scanner Distance 0 ~ 1250m (4125ft)

Frequency Range 450MHz ~ 500MHz, 820 ~ 965MHz

1705MHz ~ 1995MHz Horizontal Range 0 to (# of data points-1) x Horizontal

Resolution

Horizontal Resolution (1.5x108)(Vp) /(Delta) x 0.95 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy

Vp: cable’s relative propagation velocity Measurement Range -110 ~ 20dBm Delta[Hz] = Stop Freq – Start Freq Power Accuracy ±1.0dB

Cable Loss TD-SCDMA TX Analyzer Range 0 ~ 30dB Frequency Range 1880 ~ 1920MHz, 2010 ~ 2025MHz Resolution 0.01dB Frequency Error ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy

APP

END

IX

15-3 SPECIFICATION

Specification

TD-SCDMA(Continued) Power Range Average: 0.15 ~ 150W (21.76 ~ 51.76dBm)

Residual EVM (rms) 2.0% typical for P-CCPCH slot & 1channel,

slot power > -50dBm Peak : 4 ~ 400W (36.02 ~ 56.02dBm) Measurement Uncertainty ±4% of reading + 0.05W 1,2

Time Error (Tau) ±0.2us Input Return Loss

≤2500MHz, 27dB Min Supported Modulation QPSK/8PSK > 2500MHz, 25dB Spread Factor Auto 1,2,4,8,16 Directivity 27dB Min

Channel Power (RRC) ±1dB typical for +10dBm to -40dBm

±1.5dB Max Insertion Loss < 1GHz, < 0.05dB 1 ~ 2GHz, < 0.1dB,

T1 Analyzer 2 ~ 3.8GHz < 0.13dB Error Detect Code BPV, Frame, CRC Connector Type N-Female on both ends Alarm Detection Red Alarm, Yellow Alarm, AIS Alarm JD733A Receive Level +6 ~ -36dB DSX Sensor Type Average and Peak Electrical Interface Frequency Range 150 ~ 3500MHz Connectors Rx/TX RJ48C (100Ω)

Power Range Average: 0.25 ~ 20W (24 ~ 43dBm)

Output 0dB, -7.5dB and -15dB Peak: 0.25 ~ 20W (24 ~ 43dBm) Line Code AMI, B8ZS Measurement Uncertainty ±4% of reading + 0.05W 1,2 Impedance 100Ω or 1000Ω (Bridge)

Input Return Loss ≤2500MHz, 27dB Min

Input > 2500MHz, 25dB Term/Bridge/Monitor 0 ~ -20dB Directivity 27dB Min Transmitter and Receiver

Insertion Loss < 1GHz, < 0.05dB

Framing D4,ESF 1 ~ 2GHz, < 0.1dB Channel Formats Full T1 2 ~ 3.5GHz < 0.13dB

Test Pattern 1-8, 1-16, ALL1, ALL0, 0101 Connector Type N-Female on both ends 3E-24, QRSS, 2E-23, 2E-15 Terminating Power Sensors (Optional) 2E-23 inverse, 2E-15 inverse JD732A, JD734A,JD736A

Additional Functions Sensor Type

Average (JD732A) Reference Clock Received or Internal Peak (JD734A) Event Log Capability Internal Memory or External USB Average and Peak (JD736A) Error Insertion 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7 Frequency Range 20 ~ 3800MHz Error Rate Count CRC, Frame Code Calculated BER Power Range -30 ~ +20dBm (1uW ~ 100mW) E1 Analyzer Measurement Uncertainty ±7% of reading1,2 Error Detect Code BPV, FAS, CRC-4 Connector Type N-Male Alarm Detection FAS RAI, MFAS RAI, AIS External Reference Clock Receive Level +6 ~ -36dB DSX 10,13,15MHz External Reference Electrical Interface Input Power -10 ~ +10dBm Connectors Rx/TX RJ48C (120Ω) Connector Type SMA Output 0dB, -6dB (ITU-T Rec.G.703) Even Second Line Code AMI, HDB3 Input Level TTL Compatible Impedance Term, Monitor 120Ω, Bridge > 1000Ω Connector Type SMA Input Environmental Condition Term/Bridge/Monitor 0 ~ -20dB Operating Temperature -5 ~ 50 (23 ~ 122 ) Transmitter and Receiver Storage Temperature -20 ~ 70 (-4 ~ 158)

Framing Unframed, PCM-30, PCM-30 with CRC Calibration Cycle 1 year

PCM-31, PCM-31 with CRC Dimension Channel Formats Full T1 Weight 5.6kg (12.1lbs) (Include Battery) Test Pattern 1-8, 1-16, ALL1, ALL0, 0101, 20ITU Size (W x H x D) 315x245x95mm (12.4'x9.6'x3.7') Additional Functions General Reference Clock Received or Internal Interface Ports Event Log Capability Internal Memory or External USB Serial 1 Port Error Insertion 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7 USB 1.1 1 Port Error Rate Count CRC, Frame Code Calculated BER 10Mbps LAN 1 Port High Accuracy Power Meter GPS Antenna (SMA) 1 Port (Requires Optional Directional/Terminating Power Sensor) Built-in Speaker Display Range -80 ~ +120dBm Battery (Lithium Ion) Offset Range 0 ~ 60dB Normal Voltage 10.8V Resolution 0.01dB or 0.1xW Normal Capacity 6840mA Directional power Sensors (Optional) Maximum Charge Voltage 12.6V JD731A Battery Operation Hour 1.5 Hours at full charge Sensor Type Average and Peak Power Supply Frequency Range 300 ~ 3800MHz AC Input 100 ~ 240V 2.5A, 50 ~ 60Hz

Specification and product description subject to change without notice.

1 Specification is provided at a temperature 25±10 2 CW Condition

APPEN

DIX

15-4 BATTERY SPECIFICATION

Battery Specification

APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION

HANDLING Avoid shorting the battery Do not immerse in water. Do not disassemble or deform the battery Do not expose to, or dispose of the battery in fire. Avoid excessive physical shock or vibration. Keep out of the reach of children. Never use a battery that appears to have suffered abuse.

STORAGE Store in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area.

NOMINAL VOLTAGE The battery nominal operating voltage is 10.8V.

ENVIRONMENTAL/SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS The battery complies with the following: EMC Directive Measures 89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC Toxic Chemicals Directive 91/157/EEC “RoHS“ -directive 02/95/EC The battery has the following approvals and the pack is labeled accordingly: FCC CE

LIFE EXPECTANCY

Given normal storage & usage, user can expect the battery to deliver 80% or more of it's initial capacity after 300 charge/discharge cycles at 25°C.

SHELF LIFE

The batteries are shipped with between 80% and 90% rated capacity and this provides a minimum of 6 months shelf life, when stored at 25°C.

APP

END

IX

15-5 CABLE LIST

Cable List

APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST

Cable Type Relative Propagation Velocity (V¦) Nominal Attenuation dB/m @ 1000MHz

FSJ1-50A 0.84 0.197 FSJ250 0.83 0.134 FSJ4-50B 0.81 0.119 HCC 12-50J 0.915 0.092 HCC 158-50J 0.95 0.023 HCC 300-50J 0.96 0.014 HCC 312-50J 0.96 0.013 HCC 78-50J 0.915 0.042 HF 4-1/8” Cu2Y 0.97 0.01 HF 5” Cu2Y 0.96 0.007 HF 6-1/8”Cu2Y 0.97 0.006 HJ4.5-50 0.92 0.054 HJ4-50 0.914 0.087 HJ5-50 0.916 0.042 HJ7-50A 0.921 0.023 LDF12-50 0.88 0.022 LDF4-50A 0.88 0.077 LDF5-50A 0.89 0.043 LDF6-50 0.89 0.032 LDFF7-50A 0.88 0.027 LMR100 0.8 0.792 LMR1200 0.88 0.044 LMR1700 0.89 0.033 LMR200 O.830 0.344 LMR240 0.84 0.262 LMR400 0.85 0.135 LMR500 0.86 0.109 LMR600 0.87 0.087 LMR900 0.87 0.056 RG142 0.69 0.443 RG17, 17A 0.659 0.18 RG174 0.66 0.984 RG178B 0.69 1.509 RG187, 188 0.69 1.017 RG213/U 0.66 0.292 RG214 0.659 0.292 RG223 0.659 0.165 RG55, 55A, 55B 0.659 0.541 RG58, 58B 0.659 1.574 RG58A, 58C 0.659 0.787 RG8, 8A, 10, 10A 0.659 0.262 RG9, 9A 0.659 0.289 HFSC-12D(1/2") 0.81 0.112 HFC-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.072 HFC-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.041 HFC-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.0294 HFC-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.0243 RFCX-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.088 RFCX-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.049

APPEN

DIX

CABLE LIST 15-6

Cable List

Cable Type Relative Propagation Velocity (V¦) Nominal Attenuation dB/m @ 1000MHz

RFCX-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.038

RFCX-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.028

RFCL-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.044 RFCL-

33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.034

RFCL-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.0315

APP

END

IX

15-7 BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD

Band, Freq, Channel Std

APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD

Standard Uplink Downlink

Start Freq Stop Freq Valid Channels Start Freq Stop Freq Valid Channels

GSM

GSM450 450.4MHz 457.6MHz 259≤n≤293 460.4MHz 467.6MHz 259≤n≤293 GSM480 478.8MHz 486.0MHZ 306≤n≤340 488.8MHz 496.0MHz 306≤n≤340 GSM850 824MHz 849MHz 128≤n≤251 869MHz 894MHz 128≤n≤251 GSM900 890MHz 915MHz 1≤n≤124 935.0MHz 960MHz 1≤n≤124

EGSM900 880MHz 915MHz 0≤n≤124

925MHz 960MHz 0≤n≤124

975≤n≤1023 975≤n≤1023

RGSM900 876MHz 915MHz 0≤n≤124

921MHz 960MHz 0≤n≤124

955≤n≤1023 955≤n≤1023 DCS1800 1710MHz 1785MHz 512≤n≤885 1805.0MHz 1880MHz 512≤n≤885 PCS1900 1850MHz 1910MHz 512≤n≤810 1930MHz 1990MHz 512≤n≤810

CDMA

Band 0 (Cellular) 824MHz 849MHz 1≤n≤799

869MHz 894MHz 1≤n≤799

991≤n≤1023 991≤n≤1023 Band 1 (N.A. PCS) 1850MHz 1910MHz 0≤n≤1199 1930MHz 1990MHz 0≤n≤1199 Band 4 (Korean PCS) 1750MHz 1780MHz 0≤n≤599 1840MHz 1870MHz 0≤n≤599

Band 5 (NMT-450) 411.675MHz 483.480MHz

1≤n≤300

421.675MHZ 493.480MHz

1≤n≤300 539≤n≤871 539≤n≤871

1039≤n≤1473 1039≤n≤1473 1792≤n≤2016 1792≤n≤2016

Band 6 (IMT2000) 1920MHz 1980MHz 0≤n≤1199 2100MHz 2170MHZ 0≤n≤1199

Band 10 (2nd 800MHz) 806MHz 901MHz 0≤n≤719

851MHz 940MHz 0≤n≤719

720≤n≤919 720≤n≤919

WCDMA

Band I (2100-General) 1920 1980 9612≤n≤9888 2110 2170 10562≤n≤10838 Band II (1900-General)

1850 1910 9262≤n≤9538

1930 1990 9662≤n≤9938

Band II (1900-Additional) 12≤n≤287 412≤n≤687 Band IV (1700-General)

1710 1775 1312≤n≤1513

2100 2155 1537≤n≤1738

Band IV (1700-Additional) 1662≤n≤1862 1887≤n≤2087 Band V (850-General)

824 849 4132≤n≤4233

869 894 4357≤n≤4458

Band V (850-Additional) 782≤n≤862 1007≤n≤1087

APPEN

DIX

15-8 VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION

VSWR-RL Conversion

APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE

· Return Loss=20log10(VSWR+1/VSWR-1) (dB)

· VSWR=(10R.L./20+1/10R.L./20-1)

VSWR Return Loss (dB)

Trans. Loss (dB)

Volt. Refl Coeff

Power Trans (%)

Power Refl (%)

VSWR Return Loss (dB)

Trans. Loss (dB)

Volt. Refl Coeff

Power Trans (%)

Power Refl (%)

1.00 -- 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.64 12.3 0.263 0.24 94.1 5.9 1.01 46.1 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.66 12.1 0.276 0.25 93.8 6.2 1.02 40.1 0.000 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.68 11.9 0.289 0.25 93.6 6.4 1.03 36.6 0.001 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.70 11.7 0.302 0.26 93.3 6.7 1.04 34.2 0.002 0.02 100.0 0.0 1.72 11.5 0.315 0.26 93.0 7.0 1.05 32.3 0.003 0.02 99.9 0.1 1.74 11.4 0.329 0.27 92.7 7.3 1.06 30.7 0.004 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.76 11.2 0.342 0.28 92.4 7.6 1.07 29.4 0.005 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.78 11.0 0.356 0.28 92.1 7.9 1.08 28.3 0.006 0.04 99.9 0.1 1.80 10.9 0.370 0.29 91.8 8.2 1.09 27.3 0.008 0.04 99.8 0.2 1.82 10.7 0.384 0.29 91.5 8.5 1.10 26.4 0.010 0.05 99.8 0.2 1.84 10.6 0.398 0.30 91.3 8.7 1.11 25.7 0.012 0.05 99.7 0.3 1.86 10.4 0.412 0.30 91.0 9.0 1.12 24.9 0.014 0.06 99.7 0.3 1.88 10.3 0.426 0.31 90.7 9.3 1.13 24.3 0.016 0.06 99.6 0.4 1.90 10.2 0.440 0.31 90.4 9.6 1.14 23.7 0.019 0.07 99.6 0.4 1.92 10.0 0.454 0.32 90.1 9.9 1.15 23.1 0.021 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.94 9.9 0.468 0.32 89.8 10.2 1.16 22.6 0.024 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.96 9.8 0.483 0.32 89.5 10.5 1.17 22.1 0.027 0.08 99.4 0.6 1.98 9.7 0.497 0.33 89.2 10.8 1.18 21.7 0.030 0.08 99.3 0.7 2.00 9.5 0.512 0.33 88.9 11.1 1.19 21.2 0.033 0.09 99.2 0.8 2.50 7.4 0.881 0.43 81.6 18.4 1.20 20.8 0.036 0.09 99.2 0.8 3.00 6.0 1.249 0.50 75.0 25.0 1.21 20.4 0.039 0.10 99.1 0.9 3.50 5.1 1.603 0.56 69.1 30.9 1.22 20.1 0.043 0.10 99.0 1.0 4.00 4.4 1.938 0.60 64.0 36.0 1.23 19.7 0.046 0.10 98.9 1.1 4.50 3.9 2.255 0.64 59.5 40.5 1.24 19.4 0.050 0.11 98.9 1.1 5.00 3.5 2.553 0.67 55.6 44.4 1.25 19.1 0.054 0.11 98.8 1.2 5.50 3.2 2.834 0.69 52.1 47.9 1.26 18.8 0.058 0.12 98.7 1.3 6.00 2.9 3.100 0.71 49.0 51.0 1.27 18.5 0.062 0.12 98.6 1.4 6.50 2.7 3.351 0.73 46.2 53.8 1.28 18.2 0.066 0.12 98.5 1.5 7.00 2.5 3.590 0.75 43.7 56.3 1.29 17.9 0.070 0.13 98.4 1.6 7.50 2.3 3.817 0.76 41.5 58.5 1.30 17.7 0.075 0.13 98.3 1.7 8.00 2.2 4.033 0.78 39.5 60.5 1.32 17.2 0.083 0.14 98.1 1.9 8.50 2.1 4.240 0.79 37.7 62.3 1.34 16.8 0.093 0.15 97.9 2.1 9.00 1.9 4.437 0.80 36.0 64.0 1.36 16.3 0.102 0.15 97.7 2.3 9.50 1.8 4.626 0.81 34.5 65.5 1.38 15.9 0.112 0.16 97.5 2.5 10.00 1.7 4.807 0.82 33.1 66.9 1.40 15.8 0.122 0.17 97.2 2.8 11.00 1.6 5.149 0.83 30.6 69.4 1.42 15.2 0.133 0.17 97.0 3.0 12.00 1.5 5.466 0.85 28.4 71.6 1.44 14.9 0.144 0.18 96.7 3.3 13.00 1.3 5.762 0.86 26.5 73.5 1.46 14.6 0.155 0.19 96.5 3.5 14.00 1.2 6.040 0.87 24.9 75.1 1.48 14.3 0.166 0.19 96.3 3.7 15.00 1.2 6.301 0.88 23.4 76.6 1.50 14.0 0.177 0.20 96.0 4.0 16.00 1.1 6.547 0.88 22.1 77.9 1.52 13.7 0.189 0.21 95.7 4.3 17.00 1.0 6.780 0.89 21.0 79.0 1.54 13.4 0.201 0.21 95.5 4.5 18.00 1.0 7.002 0.89 19.9 80.1 1.56 13.2 0.213 0.22 95.2 4.8 19.00 0.9 7.212 0.90 19.0 81.0 1.58 13.0 0.225 0.22 94.9 5.1 20.00 0.9 7.413 0.90 18.1 81.9 1.60 12.7 0.238 0.23 94.7 5.3 25.00 0.7 8.299 0.92 14.8 85.2 1.62 12.5 0.250 0.24 94.4 5.6 30.00 0.6 9.035 0.94 12.5 87.5

15-9ORDERING INFORMATION

Ordering Information

ORDERING INFORMATION

Standard Spectrum Analyzer 100kHz ~ 3GHz Power Meter 100kHz ~ 3GHz

Options Note: Upgrade options for the JD7105A use the designation JD7105AU before the respective option number JD7105A001 Frequency Extension up to 3.7GHz JD7105A002 E1 Analyzer (Requires adapters G710050361, 50362 or 50363) JD7105A003 Gain/Loss Measurement (Requires option 007) JD7105A004 GPS Receiver and Antenna JD7105A005 T1 Analyzer (Requires adapters G710050361, 50362 or 50363) JD7105A006 Channel Scanner JD7105A007 Cable and Antenna Analyzer (Recommended calibration kit JD72450509) JD7105A008 Interference Analyzer (Recommended antennas G700050351~5 and/or G700050361~3) JD7105A009 GSM Channel Scanner JD7105A010 CDMA2000 OTA (Requires options 004 and 020) JD7105A011 WCDMA OTA (Requires options 004 and 030) JD7105A012 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA (Requires options 004, 040 and 041) JD7105A013 TD-SCDMA OTA (Requires options 004 and 047) JD7105A020 CDMA Analyzer JD7105A021 EVDO Analyzer (Requires option 020) JD7105A030 WCDMA Analyzer JD7105A031 HSDPA Analyzer (Requires option 030) JD7105A040 GSM/GPRS Analyzer (Recommended option 009) JD7105A041 EDGE Analyzer (Requires option 040) JD7105A047 TD-SCDM Analyzer G700050351 400 ~ 450MHz Omni RF Antenna1 G700050352 450 ~ 500MHz Omni RF Antenna1 G700050353 806 ~ 894MHz Omni RF Antenna1 G700050354 870 ~ 960MHz Omni RF Antenna1 G700050355 1710 ~ 2170MHz Omni RF Antenna1 G700050361 806 ~ 866MHz Yagi RF Antenna1 G700050362 824 ~ 894MHz Yagi RF Antenna1 G700050363 1750 ~ 2390MHz Yagi RF Antenna1 G710050361 RJ45 to Y Bantam Cable2 G710050362 RJ45 to Y BNC Cable2 G710050363 RJ45 to 4 Alligator Clips2

1 Required for OTA/Interference Measurement (Options 008, 010, 011, 012, 013) 2 Required for E1/T1 Analyzer (Option 002 or 005)

Standard Accessories JD71050341 : Soft Carrying Case G710550322 : AC-DC Adapter G710550335 : Cross LAN Cable (1.5m) GC72450517 : 1GByte USB Memory G710550321 : Lithium-ion Battery G710550316 : Stylus Pen JD71050361 : User’s Manual and Application Software CD

Optional Accessories JD72450509 : Calibration Kit, 40dB, 4GHz, 50Ω N-Type JD72450510 : Calibration Kit, 40dB,4GHz, 50Ω DIN-Type G700050571 : Adapter N(m) to DIN(f), 50Ω G700050572 : Adapter DIN(m) to DIN(m), 50Ω G700050573 : Adapter N(m) to SMA(f), 50Ω G700050574 : Adapter N(m) to BNC(f), 50Ω JD71050342 : Hard Case JD71050362 : User’s Printed Manual

High Accuracy Power Meter Sensors JD731A: Directional Power Sensor (300 ~ 3800MHz, Average Power 0.15~150W, Peak Power 4~400W) JD732A: Terminating Average Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm) JD734A: Terminating Peak Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm) JD736A: Terminating Dual Mode (Average/Peak) Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm)

Test & Measurement Regional Sales

NORTH AMERICA Tel: +1 866 228 3762 Fax: +1 301 353 9216

LATIN AMERICA Tel: +55 11 5503 3800 Fax: +55 11 5505 1598

ASIA PACIFIC Tel: +852 2892 0990 Fax: +852 2892 0770

EMEA Tel: +49 7121 86 2222 Fax: +49 7121 86 1222

© 2009 JDS Uniphase Corporation For the most recent specifications, visit www.jdsu.com. Document Release 1.7

JD7105A